®
Installation
Operation
RT-SVX10C-EN
Maintenance
Library
Service Literature
Unitary
Product Section
Product
Rooftop Air Conditioning (Comm. SZ, 20 - 130 Tons)
SAH_, SEH_, SFH_, SLH_, SSH_, SXH_
Installation/Operation/Maintenance
10C
Model
Literature Type
Sequence
Date
January 2005
File No.
SV-UN-RT-RT-SVX10C-EN-01-05
RT-SVX10C-EN 11/04
Supersedes
INTELLIPAK™
Commercial Single-Zone Rooftop Air
Conditioners with CV or VAV Controls
Models
"5" and later Design Sequence
SAHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75
SEHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75
SFHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75
SLHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75
SSHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75
SXHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75
- Units whose model numbers
have a "1" in digit 20 are certified
by Underwriters Labortory.
"X" and later Design Sequence
SXHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13 SEHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13
SFHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13 SLHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13
SSHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13
- Units whose model numbers
have a "2" in digit 20 are certified
by the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA).
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and
reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. Only
qualified technicians should perform the installation and servicing of
equipment referred to in this publication.
With 3-DTM Scroll Compressors
© 2004 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved
Table of Contents
Section One
Section Four
About The Manual ...............................................................2
Literature Change History ................................................2
Overview of Manual .........................................................2
Unit Start-Up ......................................................................55
Cooling Sequence of Operation ....................................55
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation.............................56
Fenwal Ignition System ..................................................56
Honeywell Ignition System.............................................56
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation .......................57
Flame Failure .................................................................57
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation ............................58
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation ..................................58
Electrical Phasing ..........................................................59
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance .........................60
Service Test Guide for Component Operation...............61
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation .......................................63
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;........................63
System Airflow Measurements ......................................63
Constant Volume Systems.............................................63
Variable Air Volume Systems .........................................65
Exhaust Airflow Measurement .......................................66
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement............................ 66
Economizer Damper Adjustment ................................. 80
Compressor Start-Up ................................................... 82
Compressor Operational Sounds ................................ 83
Thermostatic Expansion Valves ................................... 93
Charging by Subcooling .............................................. 93
Low Ambient Dampers ................................................. 93
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up ...................... 94
Gas Furnace Start-Up .................................................. 94
Two Stage Gas Furnace ............................................... 95
Full Modulating Gas Furnace ....................................... 97
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace ................................ 98
Final Unit Checkout ...................................................... 99
Section Two
General Information .............................................................4
Model Number Description ..............................................4
Hazard Identification ........................................................6
Commonly Used Acronyms .............................................6
Unit Description................................................................6
Input Devices & System Functions ..................................8
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units ................8
Constant Volume (CV) Units ..........................................10
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units .................................... 11
Space Temperature Averaging .......................................12
Unit Control Modules (UCM) ..........................................12
Section Three
Installation..........................................................................14
Unit Inspection ...............................................................14
Storage ...........................................................................14
Unit Clearances .............................................................14
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information ..........................14
Roof Curb and Ductwork ...............................................22
Pitch Pocket Location ....................................................23
Unit Rigging & Placement ..............................................23
General Unit Requirements ...........................................25
Main Electrical Power Requirements.............................25
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................25
Requirements for Electric Heat Units ............................25
Requirements for Gas Heat ...........................................25
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_) .....................25
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_) ..........................26
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation ...............26
Condensate Drain Connection.......................................27
Shipping Fasteners ........................................................27
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation ...................................31
Units with Statitrac™; ....................................................31
Gas Heat Units (SFH_) ..................................................32
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace
Section Five
Service & Maintenance....................................................100
Fan Belt Adjustment .....................................................104
Scroll Compressor Replacement .................................105
VFD Programming Parameters ...................................106
Monthly Maintenance ...................................................107
Filters............................................................................107
Cooling Season ............................................................107
Heating Season............................................................108
Coil Cleaning ................................................................108
Final Process .............................................................. 109
Index ........................................................................... 111
Warranty ..................................................................... 114
Gas Train........................................................................32
Flue Assembly Installation .............................................34
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_) ........................................34
Steam Heat Units (SSH_) ..............................................35
Disconnect Switch External Handle...............................38
Electric Heat Units (SEH_) ............................................38
Main Unit Power Wiring .................................................38
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)....................................44
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................45
Controls using 24 VAC ...................................................45
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs.......................45
Constant Volume System Controls ................................45
Variable Air Volume System Controls ............................46
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume System
Controls ..........................................................................46
3
General Information
Model Number Description
All products are identified by a multiple character model
number listed on the unit nameplate. An explanation of the
alphanumeric identification code is provided below. Its use
can define the unit's specific components, type of applica-
tion, i.e. CV or VAV, for a particular unit.
When ordering replacement parts or requesting service, be
sure to refer to the specific model number, serial number,
and DL number (if applicable) stamped on the unit name-
plate.
Sample Model No.:
Digit No.:
S X H F - C20 4 0 A
1 2 3 4 5,6,7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21+
1
0
A
1
5
B
1
D
0
1
A,R,L,etc.
Digit 1 - Unit Type
S = Self-Contained
Digit 10 - Design Sequence
3 = Disconnect Redesign
Note: Sequence may be any letter
A thru Z, or any digit 1 thru 9.
Digit 17 - System Control
1 = CV Control (Zone Control)
2 = VAV-(S/A Temp Control
without Inlet Guide Vanes)
3 = VAV-(S/A Temp Control
with Inlet Guide Vanes)
4 = Space Pressure Control with Exhaust VFD
without Bypass
5 = Space Pressure Control with Exhaust VFD
Digit 2 - Unit Function
A = DX Cooling, No Heat
E = DX Cooling, Electric Heat
F = DX Cooling, Natural Gas Heat
L = DX Cooling, Hot Water Heat
S = DX Cooling, Steam Heat
Digit 11 - Exhaust Option
0 = None
1 = Barometric
2 = 100% - 1.5 HP*
3 = 100% - 3 HP*
4 = 100% - 5 HP*
5 = 100% - 7.5 HP*
6 = 100% - 10 HP*
X = DX Cooling, Extended Casings
# = DX Cooling, Propane Gas Heat
and Bypass
6 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control
with VFD w/o Bypass
7 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control
Digit 3 - Unit Airflow
H = Single-Zone
7 = 100% - 15 HP*
8 = 100% - 20 HP*
A = 50% - 1.5 HP
with VFD and Bypass
8 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with VFD
without Bypass
Digit 4 - Development Sequence
F = Sixth
B = 50% - 3 HP
9 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with VFD
and Bypass
C = 50% - 5 HP
D = 50% - 7.5 HP
E = 100% - 1.5 HP**
F = 100% - 3 HP**
G = 100% - 5 HP**
H = 100% - 7.5 HP**
J = 100% - 10 HP**
K = 100% - 15 HP**
L = 100% - 20 HP**
Digits 5, 6, 7 - Nominal Capacity
C20 = 20 Tons C55 = 55 Tons
C25 = 25 Tons C60 = 60 Tons
C30 = 30 Tons C70 = 70 Tons
C40 = 40 Tons C75 = 75 Tons
C50 = 50 Tons
Digit 18 - Accessory Panel
0 = None
A = BAYSENS008*
B = BAYSENS010*
C = BAYSENS013*
D = BAYSENS014*
E = BAYSENS019*
F = BAYSENS020*
G = BAYSENS021*
Digit 8 - Power Supply
4 = 460/60/3 XL
5 = 575/60/3 XL
E = 200/60/3 XL
# = 50% w/ Statitrac
* w/Statitrac
** w/o Statitrac (CV only)
F = 230/60/3 XL
Digit 19 - Ambient Control
0 = Standard
Note: SEHF units (unit with
electric heat) utilizing 208V or
230V require dual power source.
Digit 12 - Exhaust Fan Drive
0 = None
8 = 800 PRM
9 = 900 RPM
A = 1000 RPM
B = 1100 RPM
1 = 0 Degree Fahrenheit
4 = 400 RPM
5 = 500 RPM
6 = 600 RPM
7 = 700 RPM
Digit 20 - Agency Approval
0 = None (UL Gas Heater, see note)
1 = UL
Digit 9 - Heating Capacity
2 = CSA
Note: When the second digit
calls for "F" (Gas Heat), the
following values apply:
Additionally, please note G and
M available ONLY on 50 Ton
models and above.
Digit 13 - Filter Type
A = Throwaway
B = Cleanable Wire Mesh
C = High-Efficiency Throwaway
D = Bag with Prefilters
Note: Includes UL clsssified gas heating
section only when second digit of
Model No. is a "F".
Digits 21 - 38 - Miscellaneous
21 A = Unit Disconnect Switch
22 B = Hot Gas Bypass
H = High Heat - 2 Stage
L = Low Heat - 2 Stage
E = Cartridge with Prefilters
F = No Filters (T/A Rack Only)
0 = No Heat
J = Limited Modulating High Heat
G = No Filters (Bag/Cart. Rack Only)
23 C = Economizer Control w/Comparative
Enthalpy
G = Limited Modulating Low Heat
P = Full Modulating High Heat
M = Full Modulating Low Heat
23 Z = Economizer Control w/Reference
Digit 14 - Supply Fan Horsepower
1 = 3.0 HP 6 = 20.0 HP
Enthalpy
2 = 5.0 HP 7 = 25.0 HP
23 W = Economizer Control w/Dry Bulb
23 O = None W/O Economizer
3 = 7.5 HP 8 = 30.0 HP
4 = 10.0 HP 9 = 40.0 HP1
5 = 15.0 HP
Note: When the second digit
24 E = Low Leak Fresh Air Dampers
25 F = High Duct Temperature Thermostat
calls for "E" (electric heat), the
following values apply:
D = 30 KW
H = 50 KW
R = 130 KW
U = 150 KW
26 G = High Capacity Evaporator Coil
27 H = Copper Fins (Cond. only)
Digit 15 - Supply Fan Drive
L = 70 KW
N = 90 KW
Q = 110 KW
Note: When the second digit calls
"L" (Hot Water) or "S" (Steam)
Heat, one of the following valve
size values must be in Digit 9:
High Heat Coil: 1 = 50", 2 = .75",
V = 170 KW
W = 190 KW
5 = 500 RPM
6 = 600 RPM
7 = 700 RPM
8 = 800 RPM
9 = 900 RPM
A = 1000 RPM
B = 1100 RPM
C = 1200 RPM
D = 1300 RPM
E = 1400 RPM
F = 1500 RPM
G = 1600 RPM
28 K = Generic B.A.S. Module
29 L = High-Efficiency Motors (Supply & Exhaust)
30 M = Remote Human Interface
31 N = Ventilation Override Module
32 R = Extended Grease Lines
33 T = Access Doors
34 V = Interprocessor Communications Bridge
35 0 = No communication module
Digit 16 - Fresh Air Section
A = No Fresh Air
B = 0-25% Manual
3 = 1", 4 = 1.25", 5 = 1.5", 6 = 2".
Low Heat Coil: A = .50", B = .75",
C = 1", D = 1.25", E = 1.5", F = 2".
35 Y = Trane Communication Interface Module
35 7 = LonTalk® Communication Interface Module
36 8 = Spring Isolators
D = 0-100% Economizer
37 6 = Factory-Powered 15A GFI Convenience
Outlet
38 0 = None
1. Available as standard 460 volt only for 70 and 75 ton models.
4
Sample Model No.: S X H G - D 1 1 4 0 A
H
7
C G
8
D 1
0
0
1 AT,etc
Digit No.:
1 2
3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21+
Digit 1 - Unit Type
S = Self-Contained
Digit 12 - Exhaust Air Fan Drive
0 = None
Digit 18 - Accessory Panel
0 = None
5 = 500 RPM
6 = 600 RPM
A = BAYSENS008*
B = BAYSENS010*
Digit 2 - Unit Function(s)
E = DX Cooling, Electric Heat
F = DX Cooling, Natural Gas Heat
L = DX Cooling, Hot Water Heat
S = DX Cooling, Steam Heat
7 = 700 RPM
8 = 800 RPM
C = BAYSENS013*
D = BAYSENS014*
E = BAYSENS019*
F = BAYSENS020*
Digit 13 - Filter
X = DX Cooling, Extended Casings
A = Throwaway
G = BAYSENS021*
C = High-Efficiency Throwaway
D = Bag with Prefilter
Digit 3 - Unit Airflow
Digit 19 - Ambient Control
H = Single-Zone
E = Cartridge with Prefilter
F = Throwaway Filter Rack Less Filter
Media
0 = Standard
Digit 4 - Development Sequence
Digit 20 - Agency Approval
G = Seventh
G = Bag Filter Rack Less Filter Media
0 = None (UL Gas Heater See Note 1)
1 = UL
2 = CSA
Digits 5, 6, 7 - Nominal Capacity
C90 = 90 Tons
D11 = 105 Tons
Digit 14 - Supply Air Fan HP
C = 30 HP (2-15 HP)
D = 40 HP (2-20 HP)
Note: Includes UL classified gas
heating section only when second
digit of Model No. is a "F".
D12 = 115 Tons
E = 50 HP (2-25 HP)
D13 = 130 Tons
F = 60 HP (2-30 HP)
G = 80 HP (2-40 HP)
Digits 21 - 36 - Miscellaneous
21 A = Unit Disconnect Switch
22 B = Hot Gas Bypass
23 C = Economizer Control
with Comparative Enthalpy
23 Z = Economizer Control
with Reference Enthalpy
23 W = Economizer Control w/Dry Bulb
23 0 = None W/O Economizer
24 E = Low-Leak Fresh Air Dampers
25 F = High Duct Temperature Thermostat
26 G = High Capacity Evaporator
Coil (90 - 105 Only)
27 K = Generic BAS Module
28 L = High Efficiency Motors
(Supply and Exhaust)
Digit 8 Power Supply
4 = 460/60/3 XL
Digit 15 - Supply Air Fan Drive
A = 1000 RPM
B = 1100 RPM
C = 1200 RPM
D = 1300 RPM
E = 1400 RPM
5 = 575/60/3 XL
E = 200/60/3 XL
F = 230/60/3 XL
Digit 9 - Heating Capacity
0 = No Heat
H = High Heat - 2 Stage
J = Limited Modulating High Heat
P = Full Modulating High Heat
Note: When the second digit calls
for "E" (electric heat), the following
values apply in the ninth digit:
W=190 kw
F = 1500 RPM
G = 1600 RPM
Digit 16 - Fresh Air
D = 0-100% Economizer (Std.)
Digit 17 - System Control
1 = Constand Volume Control
2 = VAV Supply Air Temperature
Control without Inlet Guide Vanes
3 = VAV - Supply Air Temperature
Control with Inlet Guide Vanes
4 = Space Pressure Control with
Exhaust VFD w/o Bypass
29 M = Remote Human Interface
30 N = Ventilation Override Module
31 R = Extended Grease Lines
32 T = Access Doors
33 V = Inter-processor Communication
Bridge
34 0 = No communication module
34 Y = Trane Communication Interface Module
34 7 = LonTalk® Communication Interface Module
Note: When the second digit calls for
"L" or "S", one of the following valve
size values must be in Digit 9:
High Heat Coil: 3 = 1.0", 4 = 1.25",
5 = 1.50", 6 = 2.0", 7 = 2.5"
Low Heat Coil: C = 1.0", D = 1.25",
E = 1.50", F = 2.0", G = 2.5"
5 = Space Pressure Control with
Exhaust and Bypass
Digit 10 - Design Sequence
W = Disconnect Redesign
Note: Sequence may be any letter
A thru Z, or any digit 1 thru 9.
6 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control 35 0 = None
with VFD without Bypass
7 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control
36 6 = Factory-Powered 15A GFI
Convenience Outlet
with VFD and Bypass
8 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with
VFD and without Bypass
9 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with
VFD and Bypass
Digit 11 - Exhaust Option
O = None
7 = 100%, 15 HP w/ Statitrac
8 = 100%, 20 HP w/ Statitrac
9 = 100%, 25 HP w/ Statitrac
F = 50%, 15 HP
H = 100%, 30 HP w/ Statitrac
J = 100%, 40 HP w/ Statitrac
K = 100%, 15 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)
L = 100%, 20 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)
M = 100%, 25 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)
N = 100%, 30 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)
P = 100%, 40 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)
Echelon, LON, LONWORKS, LonBuilder, NodeBuilder, LonManager,
LonTalk, LonUsers, Neuron, 3120, 3150, the Echelon logo, and the
LonUsers logo are trademarks of Echelon Corporation registered in the
United States and other countries. LonLink, LonResponse, LonSupport,
LonMaker, and LonPoint are trademarks of Echelon Corporation.
5
General Information (Continued)
Unit Nameplate
Commonly Used Acronyms
For convenience, a number of acronyms and abbreviations
are used throughout this manual. These acronyms are al-
phabetically listed and defined below.
BAS = Building automation systems
CFM = Cubic-feet-per-minute
CKT. = Circuit
One Mylar unit nameplate is located on the outside upper
left corner of the control panel door. It includes the unit
model number, serial number, electrical characteristics,
weight, refrigerant charge, as well as other pertinent unit
data. A small metal nameplate with the Model Number, Se-
rial Number, and Unit Weight is located just above the Mylar
nameplate, and a third nameplate is located on the inside of
the control panel door.
CV = Constant volume
CW = Clockwise
CCW = Counterclockwise
E/A = Exhaust air
ECEM = Exhaust/comparative enthalpy module
F/A = Fresh air
Compressor Nameplate
The Nameplate for the Scroll Compressor is located on the
compressor lower housing.
GBAS = Generic building automation system
HGBP = Hot gas bypass
HI = Human Interface
Hazard Identification
HVAC = Heating, ventilation and air conditioning
IGV = Inlet guide vanes
I/O = Inputs/outputs
IOM = Installation/operation/ maintenance manual
IPC = Interprocessor communications
IPCB = Interprocessor communications bridge
LCI-I = LonTalk Communication Interface for IntelliPak
LH = Left-hand
MCM = Multiple compressor module
MWU = Morning warm-up
NSB = Night setback
O/A = Outside air
psig = Pounds-per-square-inch, gauge pressure
R/A = Return air
potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING– Indicates a
CAUTION – Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against
unsafe practices.
RH = Right-hand
RPM = Revolutions-per-minute
RT = Rooftop unit
RTM = Rooftop module
S/A = Supply air
SCM = Single circuit module
SZ = Single-zone (unit airflow)
TCI = Tracer communications module
UCM = Unit control modules
VAV = Variable air volume
VCM = Ventilation control module
VOM = Ventilation override module
w.c. = Water column
WARNING
Fiberglass Wool
Product contains fiberglass wool. Disturbing the insula-
tion in this product during installation, maintenance or
repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass
wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of
California to cause cancer through inhalation. Glass
wool fibers may also cause respiratory, skin or eye irri-
tation.
Precautionary Measures
Unit Description
Each Trane commercial, single-zone rooftop air conditioner
ships fully assembled and charged with the proper refriger-
ant quantity from the factory.
An optional roof curb, specifically designed for the S_HF
and S_HG units is available from Trane. The roof curb kit
must be field assembled and installed according to the lat-
est edition of SAHF-IN-5 or SXHG-IN-2 respectively.
Trane Commercial Rooftop Units are controlled by a micro-
electronic control system that consists of a network of mod-
ules and are referred to as Unit Control Modules (UCM).
The acronym UCM is used extensively throughout this
document when referring to the control system network.
- Avoid breathing fiberglass dust.
- Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator.
- Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long-
sleeved, loose-fitting clothing, gloves, and eye
protection.
- Wash clothes separately from other clothing:
rinse washer thoroughly.
- Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear-out, and
spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring
additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate
NIOSH approved respiration in these situations.
These modules through Proportional/Integral control algo-
rithms perform specific unit functions which provide the best
possible comfort level for the customer.
First Aid Measures
They are mounted in the control panel and are factory
wired to their respective internal components. They receive
and interpret information from other unit modules, sensors,
remote panels, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the
applicable request for economizing, mechanical cooling,
heating, and ventilation. Refer to the following discussion for
an explanation of each module function.
Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove
dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention.
Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap
and warm water after handling.
6
General Information (Continued)
Rooftop Module (RTM - 1U48 Standard on all units)
The Rooftop Module (RTM) responds to cooling, heating,
and ventilation requests by energizing the proper unit com-
ponents based on information received from other unit mod-
ules, sensors, remote panels, and customer supplied bi-
nary inputs. It initiates supply fan, exhaust fan, exhaust
damper, inlet guide vane positioning or variable frequency
drive output, and economizer operation based on that in-
formation.
Ventilation Override Module (VOM - Optional 1U51)
The Ventilation Override module initiates specified func-
tions such as; space pressurization, exhaust, purge, purge
with duct pressure control, and unit off when any one of the
five (5) binary inputs to the module are activated. The com-
pressors and condenser fans are disabled during the ven-
tilation operation. If more than one ventilation sequence is
activated, the one with the highest priority is initiated.
RTM Resistance Input vs Setpoint Temperatures
Interprocessor Communications Board (IPCB -
Optional 1U55 used with the Optional Remote Human
Interface)
The Interprocessor Communication Board expands commu-
nications from the rooftop unit UCM network to a Remote
Human Interface Panel. DIP switch settings on the IPCB
module for this application should be; Switches 1 and 2
"Off", Switch 3 "On".
RTM cooling or
RTM cooling
heating
setpoint input
setpoint input
used as the
source for a
used as the
source for
SUPPLY AIR
Resistance
(Ohms) Max.
Tolerance 5%
ZONE temp
temp setpoint
setpoint (oF)
cooling (oF)
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
n/a
n/a
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
1084
992
899
796
695
597
500
403
305
208
111
Trane Communications Interface Module (TCI - Optional
1U54 used on units with Trane ICSTM
)
The Trane Communication Interface module expands com-
munications from the unit UCM network to a Trane Tracer
100TM or a Tracer SummitTM system and allows external
setpoint adjustment and monitoring of status and diagnos-
tics. DIP Switch settings on the TCI
module for these applications should be:
Tracer 100 (Comm3): Switches 1, 2, and 3 are "Off";
Tracer Summit (Comm4): Switch 1 is "On", switches 2, and
3 are "Off"
Lontalk Communication Interface Module (LCI - Optional
1U54 - used on units withTrane ICSTM or 3rd party Build-
ing AutomationSystems)
The LonTalk Communication Interface module expands
communications from the unit UCM network to a Trane
Tracer SummitTM or a 3rd party building automation system,
utilizing LonTalk, and allows external setpoint and configu-
ration adjustment and monitoring of status and diagnostics.
RTM Resistance Value vs System Operating Mode
Resistance
applied to RTM
MODE input
Terminals (Ohms)
Max. Tolerance
5%
Constant Volume Units
Fan
Mode
Auto
Auto
Auto
On
System
Mode
Off
2320
4870
7680
10770
Cool
Auto
Off
Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy Module (ECEM -
Optional 1U52 used on units with Statitrac and/or
comparative enthalpy options)
The Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy module receives infor-
mation from the return air humidity sensor, the outside air
humidity sensor, and the return air temperature sensor to
utilize the lowest possible humidity level when considering
economizer operation. In addition, it receives space pres-
sure information which is used to maintain the space pres-
sure to within the setpoint controlband. Refer to the table
below for the Humidity vs Voltage input values.
On
On
Auto
On
Cool
Auto
Heat
Heat
13320
16130
19480
27930
Compressor Module (SCM & MCM - 1U49 standard on
all units)
The Compressor module, (Single Circuit & Multiple Circuit),
upon receiving a request for mechanical cooling, energizes
the appropriate compressors and condenser fans. It moni-
tors the compressor operation through feedback information
it receives from various protection devices.
Human Interface Module (HI - 1U65 standard on all
units)
The Human Interface module enables the operator to adjust
the operating parameters for the unit using it's 16 key key-
pad. The 2 line, 40 character LCD screen provides status
information for the various unit functions as well as menus
for the operator to set or modify the operating parameters.
Heat Module (1U50 used on heating units)
The Heat module, upon receiving a request for Heating, en-
ergizes the appropriate heating stages or strokes the Modu-
lating Heating valve as required.
7
General Information (Continued)
Ventilation Control Module (VCM - Design special
option only)
For complete application details of the module, refer to En-
gineering Bulletin RT-EB-109.
The Ventilation Control Module (VCM) is located in the filter
section of the unit and is linked to the unit's UCM network.
Using a "velocity pressure" sensing ring located in the fresh
air section, allows the VCM to monitor and control the quan-
tity of fresh air entering the unit to a minimum airflow set-
point.
Input Devices & System Functions
The descriptions of the following basic Input Devices used
within the UCM network are to acquaint the operator with
their function as they interface with the various modules.
Refer to the unit's electrical schematic for the specific mod-
ule connections.
An optional temperature sensor can be connected to the
VCM which enables it to control a field installed fresh air
preheater.
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units
An optional CO sensor can be connected to the VCM to
control CO res2et. The reset function adjust the minimum
CFM upwa2rd as the CO2 concentrations increase. The
maximum effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air enter-
ing the unit is limited to the systems operating CFM. The
following table lists the Minimum Outside Air CFM vs Input
Voltage.
Supply Air Temperature Sensor (3RT9)
Is an analog input device used with CV & VAV applications.
It monitors the supply air temperature for; supply air tem-
perature control (VAV), supply air temperature reset (VAV),
supply air temperature low limiting (CV), supply air temper-
ing (CV/VAV). It is mounted in the supply air discharge sec-
tion of the unit and is connected to the RTM (1U48).
Minimum Outside Air Setpoint
w/VCM Module & TraqTM Sensing
Return Air Temperature Sensor (3RT6)
Is an analog input device used with a return humidity sen-
sor on CV & VAV applications when the comparative en-
thalpy option is ordered. It monitors the return air tempera-
ture and compares it to the outdoor temperature to estab-
lish which temperature is best suited to maintain the cooling
requirements. It is mounted in the return air section and is
connected to the ECEM (1U52).
Unit
20 & 25 Ton
30 Ton
40 Ton
50 & 55 Ton
Input Volts
0.5 - 4.5 vdc
0.5 - 4.5 vdc
0.5 - 4.5 vdc
0.5 - 4.5 vdc
CFM
0 - 14000
0 - 17000
0 - 22000
0 - 28000
0 - 33000
0 - 46000
60 thru 75 Ton 0.5 - 4.5 vdc
90 thru 130 Ton 0.5 - 4.5 vdc
Evaporator Temperature Sensor (3RT14 and 3RT15)
Is an analog input device used with CV & VAV applications.
It monitors the refrigerant temperature inside the evaporator
coil to prevent coil freezing. It is attached to the suction line
near the evaporator coil and is connected to the SCM/MCM
(1U49). It is factory set for 30 F and has an adjustable
range of 25 F to 35 F. The compressors are staged "Off" as
necessary to prevent icing. After the last compressor stage
has been turned "Off", the compressors will be allowed to
restart once the evaporator temperature rises 10 F above
the "coil frost cutout temperature" and the minimum three
minute "Off" time has elapsed.
The velocity pressure transducer/solenoid assembly is illus-
trated below. Refer to the "TraqTM Sensor Sequence of Op-
eration" section for VCM operation.
Velocity Pressure Transducer/Solenoid Assembly
Filter Switch (3S21)
Is a binary input device used on CV & VAV applications. It
measures the pressure differential across the unit filters. It
is mounted in the filter section and is connected to the RTM
(1U48). A diagnostic SERVICE signal is sent to the remote
panel if the pressure differential across the filters is at least
0.5" w.c.. The contacts will automatically open when the
pressure differential across the filters decrease to 0.4" w.c..
The switch differential can be field adjusted between 0.17"
w.c. to 5.0" w.c. ± 0.05" w.c..
Supply and Exhaust Airflow Proving Switches (3S68
and 3S69)
Generic Building Automation System Module
(GBAS - Optional 1U51 used with non-Trane building
control systems)
3S68 is a binary input device used on CV & VAV applica-
tions to signal the RTM when the supply fan is operating. It
is located in the supply fan section of the unit and is con-
nected to the RTM (1U48). During a request for fan opera-
tion, if the differential switch is detected to be open for 40
consecutive seconds; compressor operation is turned "Off",
heat operation is turned "Off", the request for supply fan op-
eration is turned "Off" and locked out, IGV's (if equipped)
are "closed", exhaust dampers (if equipped) are "closed",
economizer dampers (if equipped) are "closed", and a
manual reset diagnostic is initiated.
The Generic Building Automation System (GBAS) module
allows a non-Trane building control system to communicate
with the rooftop unit and accepts external setpoints in form
of analog inputs for cooling, heating, supply air pressure,
and a binary Input for demand limit. Refer to the "Field In-
stalled Control Wiring" section for the input wiring to the
GBAS module and the various desired setpoints with the
corresponding DC voltage inputs for both VAV and CV ap-
plications.
8
General Information (Continued)
3S69 is a binary input device used on all rooftop units
equipped with an exhaust fan. It is located in the exhaust
fan section of the unit and is connected to the RTM (1U48).
During a request for fan operation, if the differential switch
is detected to be open for 40 consecutive seconds, the
economizer is closed to the minimum position setpoint, the
request for exhaust fan operation is turned "Off" and locked
out, and a manual reset diagnostic is initiated. The fan fail-
ure lockout can be reset; at the Human Interface located in
the unit's control panel, by Tracer, or by cycling the control
power to the RTM (1S70 Off/On).
denser fans "On". If the operating fans can not bring the
condensing temperature to within the controlband, more
fans are turned on. As the saturated condensing tempera-
ture approaches the lower limit of the controlband, fans are
sequenced "Off". The minimum "On/Off" time for condenser
fan staging is 5.2 seconds. If the system is operating at a
given fan stage below 100% for 30 minutes and the satu-
rated condensing temperature is above the "efficiency
check point" setting, a fan stage will be added. If the satu-
rated condensing temperature falls below the "efficiency
check point" setting, the fan control will remain at the
present operating stage. If a fan stage cycles four times
within a 10 minute period, the control switches from control-
ling to the "lower limit" to a temperature equal to the "lower
limit" minus the "temporary low limit suppression" setting. It
will utilize this new "low limit" temperature for one hour to
reduce condenser fan short cycling.
Lead-Lag
Is a selectable mode of operation on 40 thru 130 Ton units
within the Human Interface. It alternates the starting be-
tween the first compressor of each refrigeration circuit. Only
the compressor banks will switch, not the order of the com-
pressors within a bank, providing the first compressor in
each circuit had been activated during the same request for
cooling.
High Pressure Controls
High Pressure controls are located on the discharge lines
near the scroll compressors. They are designed to open
when the discharge pressure approaches 405 ± 7 psig. The
controls reset automatically when the discharge pressure
decreases to approximately 300 ± 20 psig. However, the
compressors on that circuit are locked out and a manual re-
set diagnostic is initiated.
Supply and Exhaust Fan Circuit Breakers (1CB1, 1CB2)
The supply fan and exhaust fan motors are protected by cir-
cuit breakers 1CB1 and 1CB2 respectively. They will trip
and interrupt the power supply to the motors if the current
exceeds the breaker's "must trip" value. The rooftop module
(RTM) will shut all system functions "Off" when an open fan
proving switch is detected.
Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor (3U63)
Is an analog input device used on CV & VAV applications
with 100% economizer. It monitors the outdoor humidity lev-
els for economizer operation. It is mounted in the fresh air
intake section and is connected to the RTM (1U48).
Low Pressure Control
Is accomplished using a binary input device on CV & VAV
applications. LP cutouts are located on the suction lines
near the scroll compressors.
Return Air Humidity Sensor (3U64)
The LPC contacts are designed to close when the suction
pressure exceeds 22 ± 4 psig. If the LP control is open
when a compressor is requested to start, none of the com-
pressors on that circuit will be allowed to operate. They are
locked out and a manual reset diagnostic is initiated.
Is an analog input device used on CV & VAV applications
with the comparative enthalpy option. It monitors the return
air humidity level and compares it to the outdoor humidity
level to establish which conditions are best suited to main-
tain the cooling requirements. It is mounted in the return air
section and is connected to the ECEM (1U52).
The LP cutouts are designed to open if the suction pressure
approaches 7 ± 4 psig. If the LP cutout opens after a com-
pressor has started, all compressors operating on that cir-
cuit will be turned off immediately and will remain off for a
minimum of three minutes.
Low Ambient Control
The low ambient modulating output on the compressor
module is functional on all units with or without the low am-
bient option. When the compressor module has staged up
to it's highest stage (stage 2 or 3 depending on unit size),
the modulating output will be at 100% (10 VDC). When the
control is at stage 1, the modulating output (0 to 10 VDC)
will control the saturated condensing temperature to within
the programmable "condensing temperature low ambient
control point".
If the LP cutout trips four consecutive times during the first
three minutes of operation, the compressors on that circuit
will be locked out and a manual reset diagnostic is initiated.
Saturated Condenser Temperature Sensors (2RT1 and
2RT2)
Are analog input devices used on CV & VAV applications
mounted inside a temperature well located on a condenser
tube bend. They monitor the saturated refrigerant tempera-
ture inside the condenser coil and are connected to the
SCM/MCM (1U49). As the saturated refrigerant temperature
varies due to operating conditions, the condenser fans are
cycled "On" or "Off" as required to maintain acceptable op-
erating pressures.
Status/Annunciator Output
Is an internal function within the RTM (1U48) module on CV
& VAV applications that provides;
a. diagnostic and mode status signals to the remote
panel (LEDs) and to the Human Interface.
b. control of the binary Alarm output on the RTM.
Head Pressure Control
c. control of the binary outputs on the GBAS module to
inform the customer of the operational status and/or
diagnostic conditions.
is accomplished using two saturated refrigerant tempera-
ture sensors on CV & VAV applications. During a request
for compressor operation, when the condensing tempera-
ture rises above the "lower limit" of the controlband, the
Compressor Module (SCM/MCM) starts sequencing con-
9
General Information (Continued)
compressor(s) on that circuit "Off", locks out all compressor
operation for that circuit, and initiates a manual reset diag-
nostic.
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout
Utilizes an analog input device for CV & VAV applications.
When the system is configured for low ambient compressor
lockout, the compressors are not allowed to operate if the
temperature of the outside air falls below the lockout set-
point. When the temperature rises 5 F above the lockout
setpoint, the compressors are allowed to operate. The set-
point for units without the low ambient option is 50 F. For
units with the low ambient option, the setpoint is 0 F. The
setpoints are adjustable at the Human Interface inside the
unit control panel.
Supply AirTemperature Low Limit
Uses the supply air temperature sensor input to modulate
the economizer damper to minimum position in the event
the supply air temperature falls below the occupied heating
setpoint temperature.
Freezestat (4S12)
Is a binary input device used on CV & VAV units with Hy-
dronic Heat. It is mounted in the heat section and con-
nected to the Heat Module (1U50). If the temperature of the
air entering the heating coil falls to 40 F, the normally open
contacts on the freezestat closes signalling the Heat Mod-
ule (1U50) and the Rooftop Module (RTM) to:
a. drive the Hydronic Heat Actuator (4U15) to the full
open position.
Space Pressure Transducer (3U62)
Is an analog input device used on CV & VAV applications
with the Statitrac option. It modulates the exhaust dampers
to keep the space pressure within the building to a cus-
tomer designated controlband. It is mounted in the filter
section just above the exhaust damper actuator and is con-
nected to the ECEM (1U52). Field supplied pneumatic tub-
ing must be connected between the space being controlled
and the transducer assembly.
b. turn the supply fan "Off".
c. closes the outside air damper;
d. turns "On" the SERVICE light at the Remote Panel.
e. initiates a "Freezestat" diagnostic to the Human
Interface.
Transducer Voltage Output vs Pressure Input
4.0
High Duct Temp Thermostats (Optional 3S16, 3S17)
Are binary input devices used on CV & VAV applications
with a Trane Communication Interface Module (TCI). They
provide "high limit" shutdown of the unit and requires a
manual reset. They are factory set to open if the supply air
temperature reaches 240 F, or the return air temperature
reaches 135 F. Once tripped, the thermostat can be reset
by pressing the button located on the sensor once the air
temperature has decreased approximately 25 F below the
cutout point.
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
Compressor Circuit Breakers (1CB8, 1CB9, 1CB10,
1CB11 & 1CB14, 1CB15, 1CB16, 1CB17)
The Scroll Compressors are protected by circuit breakers
which interrupt the power supply to the compressors if the
current exceeds the breakers “must trip” value. During a re-
quest for compressor operation, if the Compressor Module
(SCM) detects a problem outside of it's normal parameters,
it turns any operating compressor(s) on that circuit "Off",
locks out all compressor operation for that circuit, and ini-
tiates a manual reset diagnostic.
0.0
-0.5 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Pressure (inches w.c.)
Morning Warm-Up - Zone Heat
When a system changes from an unoccupied to an occu-
pied mode, or switches from STOPPED to AUTO, or power
is applied to a unit with the MWU option, the heater in the
unit or external heat will be brought on if the space tem-
perature is below the MWU setpoint. The heat will remain
on until the temperature reaches the MWU setpoint. If the
unit is VAV, then the VAV box/unocc relay will continue to
stay in the unoccupied position and the VFD/IGV output
will stay at 100% during the MWU mode. When the MWU
setpoint is reached and the heat mode is terminated, then
the VAV box/unocc relay will switch to the occupied mode
and the VFD/IGV output will be controlled by the duct static
pressure. During Full Capacity MWU the economizer
damper is held closed for as long as it takes to reach
setpoint. During Cycling Capacity MWU the economizer
damper is allowed to go to minimum position after one
hour of operation if setpoint has not been reached.
Constant Volume (CV) Units
ZoneTemperature - Cooling
Relies on input from a sensor located directly in the space,
while a system is in the occupied "Cooling" mode. It modu-
lates the economizer (if equipped) and/or stages the me-
chanical cooling "On and Off" as required to maintain the
zone temperature to within the cooling setpoint deadband.
Zone Temperature - Heating
Relies on input from a sensor located directly in the space,
while a system is in the occupied "Heating" mode or an un-
occupied period, to stage the heat "on and off" or to modu-
late the heating valve (hydronic heat only) as required to
maintain the zone temperature to within the heating setpoint
deadband. The supply fan will be requested to operate any
time there is a requested for heat. On gas heat units, the
fan will continue to run for 60 seconds after the furnace is
turned off.
Compressor Motor Winding Thermostats (2B7S1,
2B17S2, 2B27S5, 2B8S3, 2B18S4 & 2B28S6)
A thermostat is embedded in the motor windings of each
Scroll compressor. Each thermostat is designed to open if
the motor windings exceeds approximately 221 F. The ther-
mostat will reset automatically when the winding tempera-
ture decreases to approximately 181 F. Rapid cycling, loss
of charge, abnormally high suction temperatures, or the
compressor running backwards could cause the thermostat
to open. During a request for compressor operation, if the
Compressor Module (SCM) detects a problem outside of
it's normal parameters, it turns any operating
Supply AirTempering
On CV units equipped with staged heat, if the supply air
temperature falls 10 F below the occupied heating setpoint
temperature while the heater is "Off", the first stage of heat
will be turned "On". The heater is turned "Off" when the sup-
ply air temperature reaches 10 F above the occupied heat-
ing setpoint temperature.
10
General Information (Continued)
and the unit will return to discharge air control. If the occ
zone heating setpoint is less than the DWU terminate
setpoint, the heat will turn off when the occ zone heat
setpoint is reached, but it will stay in DWU mode and cycle
the heat to maintain setpoint.
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units
Occupied Heating - Supply Air Temperature
When a VAV units is equipped with "Modulating Heat", and
the system is in an occupied mode, and the field supplied
changeover relay contacts (5K87) have closed, the supply
air temperature will be controlled to the customer specified
supply air heating setpoint. It will remain in the heating sta-
tus until the changeover relay contacts are opened.
Occupied Cooling - Supply AirTemperature
When a VAV unit is in the occupied mode, the supply air
temperature will be controlled to the customers specified
supply air cooling setpoint by modulating the economizer
and/or staging the mechanical cooling "On and Off" as re-
quired. The changeover relay contacts must be open on
units with "Modulating Heat" for the cooling to operate.
Daytime Warm-up
On VAV units equipped with heat, if the zone temperature
falls below the daytime warm-up initiate temperature dur-
ing the occupied mode, the system will switch to full air-
flow. During this mode, the VAV box/unocc relay, RTM K3,
will be energized (this is to signal the VAV boxes to go to
100%). After the VAV box max stroke time has elapsed
(factory set at 6 minutes), the VFD/IGV output will be set to
100%. The airflow will be at 100% and the heat will be
turned on to control to the occupied heating setpoint.
When the zone temperature reaches the daytime warm-up
termination setpoint, the heat will be turned off, the K3 re-
lay will be de-energized, releasing the VAV boxes, the
VFD/IGV output will go back to duct static pressure control
Unoccupied Heating - ZoneTemperature
When a VAV unit is equipped with gas, electric, or hydronic
heat and is in the unoccupied mode, the zone temperature
will be controlled to within the customers specified setpoint
deadband. During an unoccupied mode for a VAV unit, the
VAV box/unocc relay will be in the unoccupied position and
the VFD/IGV output will be at 100%. This means that if
there is a call for heat (or cool) and the supply fan comes
on, it will be at full airflow and the VAV boxes in the space
will need to be 100% open as signaled by the VAV box/
unocc relay.
Supply AirTempering
On VAV units equipped with "Modulating Heat", if the sup-
ply air temperature falls 10 F below the supply air tempera-
ture setpoint, the hydronic heat valve will modulate to
maintain the supply air temperature to within the low end
of the setpoint deadband.
Supply Duct Static Pressure Control (Occupied)
The RTM relies on input from the duct pressure transducer
when a unit is equipped with Inlet Guide Vanes or a Vari-
able Frequency Drive to position the Inlet Guide Vanes or
set the supply fan speed to maintain the supply duct static
pressure to within the static pressure setpoint deadband.
Refer to the Transducer Voltage Output vs Pressure Input
values listed in the Space Pressure Transducer (3U62)
section.
Unit Component Layout and "Shipwith" Locations
11
General Information (Continued)
Space Temperature Averaging with Multiple Sensors
Space Temperature Averaging
Space temperature averaging for Constant Volume applica-
tions is accomplished by wiring a number of remote sensors
in a series/parallel circuit.
The fewest number of sensors required to accomplish
space temperature averaging is four. Figure 8 illustrates a
single sensor circuit (Single Zone), four sensors wired in a
series/parallel circuit (Four Zone), nine sensors wired in a
series/parallel circuit (Nine Zone). Any number squared, is
the number of remote sensors required.
Wiring termination will depend on the type of remote panel
or control configuration for the system. Refer to the wiring
diagrams that shipped with the unit.
Unit Control Modules (UCM)
Control Module Locations for S_HF 30 Ton Units
Unit control modules are microelectronic circuit boards de-
signed to perform specific unit functions. These modules
through Proportional/Integral control algorithms provide the
best possible comfort level for the customer. They are
mounted in the control panel and are factory wired to their
respective internal components. They receive and interpret
information from other unit modules, sensors, remote pan-
els, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the applicable
request for economizing, mechanical cooling, heating, and
ventilation. Figure 9 below illustrates the typical location of
each "1U" designated module.
J2-1
RTM
1U48
1TB9
J1-1
ECEM
1U52
J2-1
Bracket
J1-1
1PCB MOD
1U55
SCM
1U49
Bracket
J2-1
Bracket
J2-1
J1-1
Heat MOD
1U50
J1-1
J1-1
Bracket
Mounting
Plate
Bracket
J2-1
GBAS MOD
1U51
Control Module Locations for S_HF 20 & 25 Ton Units
TCI MOD
1U54
OR
J2-1
J1-1
Mounting
Plate
LCI MOD
1U54
SCM
1U49
VOM
1U53
Bracket
Bracket
J2-1
J1-1
Bracket
J2-1
Heat MOD
1U50
J1-1
RTM
1U48
Mounting
Plate
J2-1
J1-1
J2-1
Bracket
J1-1
1TB9
TCI MOD
1U54
Bracket
Bracket
OR
ECEM
1U52
LCI MOD
1U54
J1-1
1PCB MOD
1U55
J2-1
J2-1
GBAS MOD
1U51
Mounting J1-1
Plate
VOM
1U53
J1-1
Bracket
J2-1
J2-1
Mounting
Plate
J1-1
12
General Information (Continued)
Control Module Locations for S_HF 40, 60, 70 &
75 Ton Units
Control Module Locations for S_HF 50 & 55 Ton Units
MCM
1U49
J2-1
MCM
Bracket
1U49
J1-1
J2-1
RTM
Heat MOD
1U50
1U48
Bracket
Heat MOD
TCI MOD
1U54
RTM
1U48
J1-1
Mounting
Plate
Bracket
OR
1U50
J1-1
LCI MOD
1U54
J2-1
J2-1
Bracket
Mounting
Plate
J2-1
J2-1
J2-1
J1-1
J1-1
1TB9
J1-1
J1-1
OR
LCI MOD
Bracket
TCI MOD
1U54
J1-1
1TB9
J2-1
ECEM
1U52
J1-1
Bracket
1U54
1PCB MOD
1U55
J1-1
Bracket
Bracket
J2-1
J2-1
J1-1
Bracket
J2-1
J1-1
J2-1
J1-1
Mounting
Plate
ECEM
1U52
J1-1
Mounting
Plate
J2-1
J1-1
Bracket
J2-1
Bracket
1PCB MOD
1U55
GBAS MOD
1U51
J2-1
J2-1
GBAS MOD
1U51
Mounting
Plate
J1-1
Mounting
Plate
VOM
1U53
VOM
1U53
Control Module Locations for S_HG 90 - 130 Ton Units
Bracket
RTM
1U48
Bracket
GBAS MOD
1U51
Mounting
Plate
VOM
Bracket
1U53
J1-1
1TB9
J1-1
Bracket
J2-1
Bracket
MCM
1U49
ECEM
1U52
J2-1
Mounting
Plate
Bracket
J1-1
J2-1
1PCB MOD
1U55
Heat MOD
1U50
J1-1
Mounting
Plate
LCI MOD
1U54
J2-1
J1-1
J2-1
TCI MOD
1U54
J1-1
J2-1
OR
J1-1
J2-1
13
Table of Contents
Section One
Section Four
About The Manual ...............................................................2
Literature Change History ................................................2
Overview of Manual .........................................................2
Unit Start-Up ......................................................................55
Cooling Sequence of Operation ....................................55
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation.............................56
Fenwal Ignition System ..................................................56
Honeywell Ignition System.............................................56
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation .......................57
Flame Failure .................................................................57
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation ............................58
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation ..................................58
Electrical Phasing ..........................................................59
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance .........................60
Service Test Guide for Component Operation...............61
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation .......................................63
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;........................63
System Airflow Measurements ......................................63
Constant Volume Systems.............................................63
Variable Air Volume Systems .........................................65
Exhaust Airflow Measurement .......................................66
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement ...........................66
Economizer Damper Adjustment ...................................80
Compressor Start-Up .....................................................82
Compressor Operational Sounds ..................................83
Thermostatic Expansion Valves.....................................93
Charging by Subcooling .................................................93
Low Ambient Dampers ...................................................93
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up ........................94
Gas Furnace Start-Up ....................................................94
Two Stage Gas Furnace ................................................95
Full Modulating Gas Furnace.........................................97
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace...................................98
Final Unit Checkout........................................................99
Section Two
General Information .............................................................4
Model Number Description ..............................................4
Hazard Identification ........................................................6
Commonly Used Acronyms .............................................6
Unit Description................................................................6
Input Devices & System Functions ..................................8
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units ................8
Constant Volume (CV) Units ..........................................10
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units .................................... 11
Space Temperature Averaging .......................................12
Unit Control Modules (UCM) ..........................................12
Section Three
Installation..........................................................................14
Unit Inspection ...............................................................14
Storage ...........................................................................14
Unit Clearances .............................................................14
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information ..........................14
Roof Curb and Ductwork ...............................................22
Pitch Pocket Location ....................................................23
Unit Rigging & Placement ..............................................23
General Unit Requirements ...........................................25
Main Electrical Power Requirements.............................25
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................25
Requirements for Electric Heat Units ............................25
Requirements for Gas Heat ...........................................25
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_) .....................25
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_) ..........................26
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation ...............26
Condensate Drain Connection.......................................27
Shipping Fasteners ........................................................27
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation ...................................31
Units with Statitrac™; ....................................................31
Gas Heat Units (SFH_) ..................................................32
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace
Section Five
Service & Maintenance....................................................100
Fan Belt Adjustment .....................................................104
Scroll Compressor Replacement .................................105
VFD Programming Parameters ...................................106
Monthly Maintenance ...................................................107
Filters............................................................................107
Cooling Season ............................................................107
Heating Season............................................................108
Coil Cleaning ................................................................108
Final Process ...............................................................109
Gas Train........................................................................32
Flue Assembly Installation .............................................34
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_) ........................................34
Steam Heat Units (SSH_) ..............................................35
Disconnect Switch External Handle...............................38
Electric Heat Units (SEH_) ............................................38
Main Unit Power Wiring .................................................38
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)....................................44
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................45
Controls using 24 VAC ...................................................45
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs.......................45
Constant Volume System Controls ................................45
Variable Air Volume System Controls ............................46
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume System
Index ............................................................................... 111
UV ................................................................................... 114
Warranty ......................................................................... 114
Controls ..........................................................................46
Installation
Unit Inspection
Storage
Take precautions to prevent condensate from forming inside
the unit’s electrical compartments and motors if:
As soon as the unit arrives at the job site
[ ] Verify that the nameplate data matches the data on the
sales order and bill of lading (including electrical data).
a. the unit is stored before it is installed; or,
b. the unit is set on the roof curb, and temporary heat is
provided in the building. Isolate all side panel service
entrances and base pan openings (e.g., conduit
holes, S/A and R/A openings, and flue openings)
from the ambient air until the unit is ready for startup.
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the unit name-
plate specifications.
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the electric
heater specifications on the uit nameplate.
[ ] Visually inspect the exterior of the unit, including the roof,
for signs of shipping damage.
Note: Do not use the unit's heater for temporary
heat without first completing the startup procedure
detailed under "Starting the Unit".
[ ] Check for material shortages. Refer to the Component
Layout and Shipwith Location illustration.
Trane will not assume any responsibility for
equipment damage resulting from condensate accumulation
on the unit's electrical and/or mechanical components.
If the job site inspection of the unit reveals damage or mate-
rial shortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately.
Specify the type and extent of the damage on the "bill of
lading" before signing.
Unit Clearances
Figure 3-1 illustrates the minimum operating and service
clearances for either a single or multiple unit installation.
These clearances are the minimum distances necessary to
assure adequate serviceability, cataloged unit capacity, and
peak operating efficiency.
[ ] Visually inspect the internal components for shipping
damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it
is stored. Do not walk on the sheet metal base pans.
Providing less than the recommended clearances may re-
sult in condenser coil starvation, "short-circuiting" of ex-
haust and economizer airflows, or recirculation of hot con-
denser air.
WARNING
No Step Surface!
FOR ACCESS TO COMPONENTS, THE BASE SHEET
METAL SURFACE MUST BE REINFORCED.
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information
Bridging between the unit's main supports may consist
of multiple 2 by 12 boards or sheet metal grating.
Overall unit dimensional data for a SAHF (20 thru 75 Ton)
cooling only unit is illustrated in Figure 3-2A. Tables 3-1A,
3-1B, and 3-1C list the dimensions. Dimensional data for
SEH_, SFH_, SLH_, SSH_, and SXH_ (20 thru 130 Ton)
units are illustrated in Figure 3-2B. Tables 3-2A, 3-2B, and
3-2C list the dimensions for the 20 thru 75 Ton units. Di-
mensions for 90 through 130 Ton units are listed on the il-
lustration in Figure 3-2C.
Failure to comply could result in death or severe
personal injury from falling.
[ ] If concealed damage is discovered, notify the carrier's
terminal of damage immediately by phone and by mail.
Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days.
A Center-of-Gravity illustration and the dimensional data is
shown in Figure 3-3.
Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by
the carrier and the consignee. Do not remove damaged
material from the receiving location. Take photos of the
damage, if possible. The owner must provide reasonable
evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery.
Table 3-3 list the typical unit and curb operating weights.
Weights shown represent approximate operating weights.
Actual weights are stamped on the unit nameplate.
[ ] Remove the protective plastic coverings that shipped
over the compressors.
14
Figure 3-1
Minimum Operation and Service Clearances for Single & Multiple Unit Installation
15
Installation (Continued)
Table 3-1A
Unit Dimensional Data
Unit
Size
20 & 25 Ton
30 Ton
40 Ton
50 & 55 Ton
60 Ton
Dimensions
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
7'
7'
8'
8'
8'
8'
J
21'-9 3/4"
21'-9 3/4"
27'-0"
29'-8"
27'-0"
5'-3 1/8"
5'-8 5/8"
6'-1 5/8"
5'-3 1/8"
6'-1 5/8"
6'-1 5/8"
7'-6 1/2" 5'-8 15/16" 3'-9 5/16"
12'-6"
12'-6"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1'-3 1/2"
1'-3 1/2"
2'-5"
2'-5"
2'-5"
7'-6 1/2"
7'-6 1/2"
7'-6 1/2"
9'-8"
6'-2 7/16" 4'-9 5/16"
6'-7 3/8"
5'-8 7/8"
6'-7 3/8"
6'-7 3/8"
5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"
6'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"
5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"
5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"
70 & 75 Ton
27'-0"
9'-8"
1'-4"
Table 3-1B
Unit Base Dimensional Data
Unit
Dimensions
D
Size
A
B
C
E
F
G
14'-0 1/4"
2'-2 1/2"
11 3/4"
5'-7"
5'-7"
3'-4 3/8"
5 13/16" 6'-6 15/16"
20 - 30 Ton
16'-7 13/16"
16'-7 13/16"
16'-7 13/16"
2'-5"
2'-5"
2'-5"
11 3/4"
3'-4 3/8"
4'-5 3/8"
4'-5 3/8"
5 13/16"
5 13/16"
5 13/16"
7'-8 3/16"
7'-8 3/16"
7'-8 3/16"
40 - 55 Ton
60 Ton
1'-4 9/16" 6'-10 7/8"
1'-4 9/16" 6'-10 7/8"
70 - 75 Ton
Table 3-1C
Electrical Entrance Data
Unit
Dimensions
Size
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
20, 25, & 30 8 7/32" 6 31/32" 15 21/32" 13 21/32" 9 17/32" 8 1/2" 18 1/16" 19 9/16"
50 & 55 Ton
40, 60, 70
& 75 Ton
8 3/4" 7 3/4"
17 7/8"
15 7/8" 9 29/32" 10 1/16" 20 13/32" 22 5/32"
17
Installation (Continued)
Table 3-2A
Unit Dimensional Data
Unit
Dimensions
D
Size
A
B
C
E
F
G
1"
1"
H
J
20 & 25 Ton 24'-1 3/8" 5'-3 1/8" 7'-6 1/2" 5'-8 15/16" 3'-9 5/16"
13'-3"
13'-3"
7' 1'-3 1/2"
7' 1'-3 1/2"
8'
8'
8'
8'
30 Ton
40 Ton
24'-1 3/8" 5'-8 5/8" 7'-6 1/2" 6'-2 3/8" 4'-9 5/16"
30'-2 1/2" 6'-1 5/8" 7'-6 1/2" 6'-7 3/8" 5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"
50 & 55 Ton 32'-10 1/2" 5'-3 1/8" 7'-6 1/2" 5'-8 7/8" 6'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"
2'-5"
2'-5"
2'-5"
1'-4"
60 Ton
30'-2 1/2" 6'-1 5/8"
9'-8"
9'-8"
6'-7 3/8" 5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"
6'-7 3/8" 5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"
70 & 75 Ton 30'-2 1/2" 6'-1 5/8"
Dimensions
K
L
M
N
O
9"
9"
9"
9"
9"
16'-7"
16'-7"
19'-7"
19'-7"
19'-7"
16'-6"
16'-6"
See Note
See Note
See Note
8 1/8"
8 1/8"
8 1/8"
8 1/8"
8 1/8"
6 1/4"
6 1/4"
6 1/4"
6 1/4"
6 1/4"
Note:
19'-6" for SFHF "Low Heat" units or 20'-3" for SFHF "High Heat" units.
Table 3-2B
Unit Base Dimensional Data
Unit
Dimensions
Size
20 - 30 Ton 16'-3 3/16" 2'-2 1/2" 5 13/16" 5'-7" 3'-4 3/8" 5 13/16" 6'-6 15/16" 15'-5 5/16"
40 - 55 Ton 19'-10 5/16" 2'-5" 7 1/16" 5'-7" 3'-4 3/8" 5 13/16" 7'-8 3/16" 18'-11 11/16"
60 Ton 19'-10 5/16" 2'-5"
70 - 75 Ton 19'-10 5/16" 2'-5"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6 1/16" Note 1 4'-5 3/8" 5 13/16" 7'-8 3/16" 18'-11 11/16"
6 1/16" Note 1 4'-5 3/8" 5 13/16" 7'-8 3/16" 18'-11 11/16"
Unit
Size
Dimensions
J
K
L
20 - 30 Ton 16'-9 3/4" 8 13/16" 9 1/16"
40 - 55 Ton 20'-1 3/4" 8 3/16" 9 1/16"
60 Ton
20'-1 3/4" 8 3/16" 9 1/16"
70 - 75 Ton 20'-1 3/4" 8 3/16" 9 1/16"
Note:
1. 5'-5 15/16" for SEHF units or 7'-8 1/2" for SFHF, SLHF, SSHF, SXHF units.
Table 3-2C
Electrical Entrance Data
Unit
Size
Dimensions
J
F
G
H
K
L
M
N
20, 25, & 30 8 7/32" 6 31/32" 15 21/32" 13 21/32" 9 17/32" 8 1/2" 18 1/16" 19 9/16"
50 & 55 Ton
40, 60, 70
& 75 Ton
8 3/4" 7 3/4" 17 7/8" 15 7/8" 9 29/32" 10 1/16" 20 13/32" 22 5/32"
Table 3-2D
CPVC Dimensional Data
Unit Size
Furnace Dimensions (Note)
Unit Size
Furnace Dimensions (Note)
Size/MBH
20 & 25 Ton Low = 235 195-5/32"
High = 500 195-5/32"
Length
Height
9-5/32"
9-5/32"
9-5/32"
9-5/32"
9-5/32"
9-5/32"
Size/MBH
50 - 75 Ton Low = 500 240-1/8"
High = 850 231-1/8"
Length
Height
9-5/32"
9-5/32"
30 Ton
Low = 350 195-5/32"
High = 500 195-5/32"
Low = 350
90 -130 Ton
Note:
1000
267-3/16" 10-11/32"
The length dimension is from the exhaust
end of the unit. The height dimension is
from the bottom of the unit base rail.
40 Ton
240-1/8"
High = 850 231-1/8"
19
Figure 3-2C
S_HG Cooling & Heating Units (90 through 130 Ton)
20
Figure 3-3
Center-of-Gravity Data (See Note 1)
Units with
100%
Units
without
Units
with Supply &
Exhaust Fan Exhaust Fan Exhaust VFD
Unit Unit Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim.
Model Size
A
B
A
B
A
B
C20 12' 6" 3' 8" 13' 5" 3' 10" 11' 10" 3' 9"
C25 12' 9" 3' 8" 13' 7" 3' 10" 12' 0" 3' 9"
C30 12' 5" 3' 8" 13' 3" 3' 10" 11' 9" 3' 9"
C40 15' 7" 3' 10" 16' 9" 4' 0" 14' 10" 3' 11"
C50 16' 7" 3' 10" 17' 9" 4' 0" 15' 8" 3' 11"
C55 16' 10" 3' 10" 18' 1" 4' 0" 16' 0" 3' 11"
C60 15' 7" 4' 7" 16' 11" 4' 10" 14' 10" 4' 8"
C70 15' 10" 4' 8" 17' 1" 4' 10" 15' 2" 4' 9"
C75 15' 11" 4' 8" 17' 2" 4' 10" 15' 2" 4' 9"
C20 13' 8" 3' 8" 14' 7" 3' 10" 12' 11" 3' 9"
C25 13' 10" 3' 7" 14' 9" 3' 9" 13' 1" 3' 9"
C30 13' 6" 3' 8" 14' 5" 3' 9" 12' 10" 3' 9"
C40 17' 10" 3' 10" 18' 3" 3' 11" 16' 3" 3' 11"
C50 18' 1" 3' 10" 19' 4" 4' 0" 17' 2" 3' 11"
C55 18' 5" 3' 11" 19' 8" 4' 0" 17' 8" 3' 10"
C60 17' 0" 4' 7" 18' 6" 4' 9" 16' 3" 4' 8"
C70 17' 5" 4' 8" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 7" 4' 9"
C75 17' 5" 4' 8" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 7" 4' 9"
C20 13' 10" 3' 8" 14' 8" 3' 10" 13' 1" 3' 9"
C25 14' 0" 3' 7" 14' 10" 3' 9" 13' 3" 3' 8"
C30 13' 8" 3' 8" 14' 6" 3' 9" 13' 0" 3' 9"
C40 17' 3" 3' 9" 18' 5" 3' 11" 16' 6" 3' 10"
C50 18' 2" 3' 10" 19' 4" 4' 0" 17' 4" 3' 11"
C55 18' 6" 3' 10" 19' 8" 3' 11" 17' 8" 3' 10"
C60 17' 3" 4' 6" 18' 7" 4' 9" 16' 5" 4' 7"
C70 17' 6" 4' 7" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 9" 4' 8"
C75 17' 6" 4' 7" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 9" 4' 8"
SAHF
SEHF
SLHF
SSHF
SXHF
SFHF
SXHG,
SEHG,
SLHG,
SSHG
SFHG
C90 18' 9" 5’ 10" 20' 4" 6' 2" 17' 9" 5' 10"
D11 19' 1" 5’ 11" 20’ 7" 6' 2" 18' 1" 6' 0"
C90 18' 11" 6' 0" 20' 6" 6' 3" 17' 10" 5' 11"
D11 19' 3" 6' 0" 20' 9" 6' 4" 18' 4" 6' 7"
SXHG,
SEHG,
SLHG,
SSHG
SFHG
D12 19' 2" 5' 10" 20' 8" 6' 2" 18' 1" 6' 0"
D13 19' 5" 5' 10" 20' 11" 6' 2" 18' 6" 6' 0"
D12 19' 4" 6' 0" 20' 9" 6' 3" 18' 3" 6' 1"
D13 19' 6" 6' 0" 21' 10" 6' 3" 18' 8" 6' 0"
Note:
1. Dimensions shown for the center-of-gravity are
approximate and are based on a unit equipped with:
Standard coils, 100% economizer, throwaway filters,
hi-efficiency motors, inlet guide vanes, 460 volt XL start,
high capacity heat (as applicable).
21
Installation (Continued)
Table 3-3
Typical Unit & Curb Weights
Typical Unit Operating Weight (1)
SE,SL,
Roof Curb
Max. Weight (3)
SAHF S*HF/G
Unit
Size
C20
C25
C30
C40
C50
C55
C60
C70
C75
C90
D11
D12
D13
SAHF
4360
4520
5220
6890
7890
8140
9320
9860
9860
SSHF
4690
4860
5590
7400
8450
8690
9650
SFHF
4970
5130
5840
7880
8900
9170
10120
SXHF
4580
4750
5460
7240
8290
8540
9480
SEHG
SFHG
SXHG
490
490
490
515
515
515
610
610
610
510
510
510
550
550
550
640
640
640
770
770
770
770
10160 10640 10040
10160 10640 10040
14730 15400 14580
15310 15940 15160
15730 16370 15560
16080 16710 15930
Typical Unit Operating Weight (2)
SE,SL,
Roof Curb
Max. Weight (3)
SXHG SAHF S*HF/G
Unit
Size
C20
C25
C30
C40
C50
C55
C60
C70
C75
C90
D11
D12
D13
SAHF
4650
4830
5570
7290
8350
8600
9840
SSHF
5000
5180
5930
7820
8900
9160
SFHF
5270
5440
6200
8280
9380
9640
SXHF
4860
5060
5800
7650
8740
9010
SEHG
SFHG
490
490
490
515
515
515
610
610
610
510
510
510
550
550
550
640
640
640
770
770
770
770
10150 10620 10010
10370 10690 11160 10560
10370 10690 11160 10560
15460 16050 15240
15950 16590 15810
16380 17010 16220
16730 17380 16580
1. The weights shown in this table represents the typical unit operating weights for the
heating/cooling function indicated with an economizer and exhaust fan installed.
2. The weights shown represents the typical unit operating weights for the
heating/cooling function indicated with an economizer, exhaust fan with supply &
exhaust VFD installed.
Note:
3. Roof curb weights include the curb and pedestal.
Roof Curb and Ductwork
Note: To assure proper condensate flow during
operation, the unit (and curb) must be as level as
possible. The maximum slope allowable for rooftop
unit applications, excluding SSH_'s, is 4" end-to-
end and 2" side-to-side. Units with steam coils
(SSH_'s) must be set level!
The roof curbs for 20 through 130 Ton units consists of two
main components; a pedestal to support the unit’s con-
denser section and a "full perimeter" enclosure to support
the unit’s air handler section.
Before installing any roof curb, verify;
1. That it is the correct curb for the unit,
If the unit is elevated, a field constructed catwalk around the
unit is strongly recommended to provide easy access for
unit maintenance and service.
2. That it includes the necessary gaskets and
hardware,
Recommendations for installing the Supply Air and Return
Air ductwork joining the roof curb are included in the curb
instruction booklet. Curb ductwork must be fabricated and
installed by the installing contractor before the unit is set
into place.
3. That the purposed installation location provides
the required clearance for proper operation.
4. Insure that the curb is level and square. The top
surface of the curb must be true to assure an
adequate curb-to-unit seal.
Note: For sound consideration, cut only the holes
in the roof deck for the ductwork penetrations. Do
not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb
perimeter.
Step-by-step curb assembly and installation instructions
ship with each Trane accessory roof curb kit. Follow the in-
structions carefully to assure proper fit-up when the unit is
set into place.
22
Installation (Continued)
Trane's Engineering Bulletin RT-EB-80 provides additional
information concerning duct design and sound reduction.
Note: If a “built-up” curb is provided by others,
keep in mind that these commercial rooftop units
do not have base pans in the condenser section.
Pitch Pocket Location
Note: If this is a REPLACEMENT UNIT keep in mind
that the CURRENT DESIGN commerical rooftop
unitsdo not have base pans in the condenser
section.
The location of the main supply power entry for S_HF 20
through 75 Ton rooftop units is located at the bottom right-
hand corner of the control panel. Figures 3-2A, B & C illus-
trate the location for the electrical entrance through the
base in order to enter the control panel. If the power supply
conduit penetrates the building’s roof beneath this opening,
it is recommended that a pitch pocket be installed before
the unit is placed onto the roof curb. The center line dimen-
sions shown in the illustration below indicates the center
line of the electrical access hole in the unit base when it is
positioned on the curb, ±3/8 inch. The actual diameter of
the hole in the roof should be at least 1/2 inch larger than
the diameter of the conduit penetrating the roof. This will al-
low for the clearance variable between the roof curb rail and
the unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-5.
Unit Rigging & Placement
WARNING
Heavy Objects!
Do not use cables (chains or slings) except as shown.
Each of the cables (chains or slings) used to lift the unit
must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the
unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the
same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift.
Other lifting arrangements may cause equipment or
property-only damage. Failure to properly lift unit may
result in death or serious injury. See details below.
The pitch pocket dimensions listed are recommended to en-
hance the application of roofing pitch after the unit is set
into place. The pitch pocket may need to be shifted as illus-
trated to prevent interference with the curb pedestal.
Note: Use spreader bars as shown in the diagram.
Refer to the Installation manual or nameplate for
the unit weight.Refer to the Installation Instructions
located inside the side control panel for further
rigging information.
1. A Center-of-Gravity illustration and the dimensional data
is shown in Figure 3-3.
2. Attach adequate strength lifting slings to all four lifting
lugs on 20 through 75 Ton units and to all six lifting lugs
on 90 through 130 Ton units. The minimum distance be-
tween the lifting hook and the top of the unit should be 7
feet for 20 through 75 Ton units and 12 feet for 90
through 130 Ton units. Figure 3-4 illustrates the installa-
tion of spreader bars to protect the unit and to facilitate a
uniform lift. Table 3-3 list the typical unit operating
weights.
Unit
S*HF
S*HF
Tonnage
20, 25 & 30
50 & 55
“A” Dimension "B" Dimension
4' 5-9/16"
9' 5-11/16"
6' 9-5/8"
5-9/16"
5-1/2"
7-3/16"
3. Test-lift the unit to ensure it is properly rigged and bal-
anced, make any necessary rigging adjustments.
S*HF 40, 60, 70 & 75
* = All unit functions (SAHF, SEHF, SFHF, SSHF, SLHF and SXHF)
4. Lift the unit and position it over the curb and pedestal.
(These units have a continuous base rail around the air
handler section which matches the curb.
If a Trane Curb Accessory Kit is not used:
a. The ductwork can be attached directly to the
factory-provided flanges around the unit’s supply and
return air openings. Be sure to use flexible duct
connections at the unit.
5. Align the base rail of the unit’s air handler section with
the curb rail while lowering the unit onto the curb. Make
sure that the gasket on the curb is not damaged while
positioning the unit. (The pedestal simply supports the
unit’s condenser section)
b. For “built-up” curbs supplied by others, gaskets must
be installed around the curb perimeter flange and the
supply and return air opening flanges.
A cross section of the juncture between the unit and the
roof curb is shown in Figure 3-5.
23
Figure 3-4
Typical Unit Rigging
Figure 3-5
Unit Base & Roof Curb Section
24
Installation (Continued)
General Unit Requirements
Field Installed Control Wiring
The checklist listed below is a summary of the steps re-
quired to successfully install a Commercial rooftop unit.
This checklist is intended to acquaint the installing person-
nel with what is required in the installation process. It does
not replace the detailed instructions called out in the appli-
cable sections of this manual.
[ ] Complete the field wiring connections for the constant
volume controls as applicable. Refer to "Field Installed
Control Wiring" for guidelines.
[ ] Complete the field wiring connections for the variable air
volume controls as applicable. Refer to "Field Installed
Control Wiring" for guidelines.
[ ] Check the unit for shipping damage and material short-
age; file a freight claim and notify Trane office.
Note: All field-installed wiring must comply with
NEC and applicable local codes.
[ ] Verify that the installation location of the unit will provide
the required clearance for proper operation.
Requirements for Electric Heat Units
All SEHF Units (380 minimum voltage) & SEHG units.
[ ] Assemble and install the roof curb. Refer to the current
edition of SAHF-IN-5 for 20 through 75 Ton units or
SXHG-IN-2 for 90 through 130 Ton units.
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the electric
heater specifications on the unit and heater nameplate.
[ ] Fabricate and install ductwork; secure ductwork to curb.
[ ] Inspect the heater junction box and control panel; tighten
any loose connections.
[ ] Install pitch pocket for power supply through building
roof. (If applicable)
[ ] Check electric heat circuits for continuity.
[ ] Rigging the unit.
SEHF Units w/200V or 230V Electric Heat:
(Requires Separate Power Supply to Heater)
[ ] Set the unit onto the curb; check for levelness.
[ ] Connect properly sized and protected power supply wir-
ing for the electric heat from a dedicated, field- supplied/
installed disconnect to terminal block 4TB2, or to an op-
tional unit mounted disconnect switch 4S15.
[ ] Ensure unit-to-curb seal is tight and without buckles or
cracks.
[ ] Install and connect condensate drain lines to each
evaporator drain connection.
Requirements for Gas Heat
[ ] Remove the shipping hardware from each compressor
assembly.
[ ] Gas supply line properly sized and connected to the unit
gas train.
[ ] Remove the shipping hold-down bolts and shipping chan-
nels from the supply and exhaust fans ordered with rub-
ber or spring isolators.
[ ] All gas piping joints properly sealed.
[ ] Drip leg Installed in the gas piping near the unit.
[ ] Check all optional supply and exhaust fan spring isola-
tors for proper adjustment.
[ ] Gas piping leak checked with a soap solution. If piping
connections to the unit are complete, do not pressurize
piping in excess of 0.50 psig or 14 inches w.c. to prevent
component failure.
[ ] Verify that all plastic coverings are removed from the
compressors.
[ ] Verify all discharge and liquid line service valves (one per
circuit) are back seated.
[ ] Main supply gas pressure adequate.
[ ] Flue Tubes clear of any obstructions.
Main Electrical Power Requirements
[ ] Factory-supplied flue assembly installed on the unit.
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the unit name-
plate specifications.
[ ] Connect the 3/4" CPVC furnace drain stubout to a proper
condensate drain.
[ ] Inspect all control panel components; tighten any loose
connections.
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_)
[ ] Connect properly sized and protected power supply wir-
ing to a field-supplied/installed disconnect and unit
[ ] Route properly sized water piping through the base of the
unit into the heating section.
[ ] Properly ground the unit.
[ ] Install the factory-supplied, 3-way modulating valve.
[ ] Complete the valve actuator wiring.
Note: All field-installed wiring must comply with
NEC and applicable local codes.
25
Installation (Continued)
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_)
[ ] Use float and thermostatic traps in the system, as re-
quired by the application.
[ ] Install an automatic air vent at the top of the return water
coil header.
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation
(All units with Statitrac)
[ ] Route properly sized steam piping through the base of
the unit into the heating section.
[ ] O/A pressure sensor mounted to the roof bracket.
[ ] Install the factory-supplied, 2-way modulating valve
[ ] Complete the valve actuator wiring.
[ ] Factory supplied pneumatic tubing installed between the
O/A pressure sensor and the connector on the vertical
support.
[ ] Install 1/2", 15-degree swing-check vacuum breaker(s) at
the top of each coil section. Vent breaker(s) to theatmo-
sphere or merge with return main at discharge side of
steam trap.
[ ] Field supplied pneumatic tubing connected to the proper
fitting on the space pressure transducer located in the
filter section, and the other end routed to a suitable sens-
ing location within the controlled space.
[ ] Position the steam trap discharge at least 12" below the
outlet connection on the coil.
Figure 3-6A
Condensate Drain Locations
26
Installation (Continued)
Condensate Drain Connections
the unit's base rail. To locate and remove the shipping hard-
ware, refer to Figure 3-7 and the following procedure.
Each S_HF unit is provided with two or six 1" evaporator
condensate drain connections (one on each side of the
unit). Each S_HG unit is provided with two or six 1-1/4"
evaporator drain connections (one on each side of the unit.)
1. Remove the four anchor bolts (2 front and 2 rear), used
to secure the shipping brace to the unit's base rail (two
assemblies on 40 through 60 Ton units).
Due to the size of these units, all condensate drain connec-
tion must be connected to the evaporator drain connec-
tions. Refer to the appropriate illustration in Figure 3-2 for
the location of these drain connections.
2. Remove the three self-tapping screws that secure each
shipping brace to the compressor mounting rails.
3. Remove and discard the two 30-1/2" long shipping
braces for each assembly.
A condensate trap must be installed due to the drain con-
nection being on the "negative pressure" side of the fan. In-
stall the P-Traps at the unit using the guidelines in Figure 3-
6.
4. Do not remove the shipping bracket located on top of the
compressors.
5. Ensure that the compressor rail assembly is free to move
on the rubber isolators.
Pitch the drain lines at least 1/2 inch for every 10 feet of
horizontal run to assure proper condensate flow. Do not al-
low the horizontal run to sag causing a possible double-trap
condition which could result in condensate backup due to
"air lock".
Removing Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware
(70 & 105 Ton)
Each manifolded compressor assembly is rigidly bolted to a
mounting rail assembly. The rail assembly sets on six (6)
rubber isolators. The assembly is held in place by four (4)
shipping "Tiedown" bolts. To remove the shipping hardware,
follow the procedures below:
Units with Gas Furnace
Units equipped with a gas furnace have a 3/4" CPVC drain
connection stubbed out through the vertical support in the
gas heat section. It is extremely important that the conden-
sate be piped to a proper drain. Refer to the appropriate il-
lustration in Figure 3-2 for the location of the drain connec-
tion.
1. At each "Tiedown" location (2 front and 2 rear), remove
and discard the tiedown bolt and the slotted shipping
spacer located between the compressor rails and the
unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-7B, "Tiedown Bolt"
detail.
Note: Units equipped with an optional modulating
gas furnace will likely operate in a condensing
mode part of the time.
2. Remove the bolt in each rubber isolator and the slotted
shipping spacer located between the compressor rails
and the unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-7B, "Isolator
Bolt" detail. Reinstall the bolts at the same location by
screwing them into the base rail two to three turns only.
An additional 1-1/4" non-connectable water drain is located
in the base rail within the heating section.
Ensure that all condensate drain line installations comply
with applicable building and waste disposal codes.
3. Ensure that the compressor rail assembly is free to move
on the rubber isolators.
Figure 3-6
Condensate Trap Installation
Shipping Fasteners
Removing Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware
(115 and 130 Ton)
Each manifolded compressor assembly is rigidly bolted to a
mounting rail assembly. The rail assembly sets on eight (8)
rubber isolators. The assembly is held in place by six (6)
"Tiedown Bolts". To remove the shipping hardware, follow
the procedure below:
1. At each "Tiedown" location (6), remove and discard the
tiedown bolt and the slotted shipping spacer located be-
tween the compressor rails and the unit base rail illus-
trated in Figure 3-7C, "Tiedown Bolt" detail.
2. Remove the bolt in each rubber isolator and the slotted
shipping spacer located between the compressor rails
and the unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-7C, "Isolator
Bolt" detail. Reinstall the bolts at the same location by
screwing them into the base rail two to three turns only.
3. Ensure that the compressor rail assembly is free to move
on the rubber isolators.
Removing Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware
(20 through 60 Ton)
Each manifolded compressor assembly is rigidly bolted to a
mounting rail assembly. The rail assembly sets on four (4)
rubber isolators. The assembly is held in place by two ship-
ping braces that secure each compressor rail assembly to
27
Figure 3-7A
Removing Scroll Compressor Shipping Hardware for 20 through 60 Ton Units
Figure 3-7B
Removing Scroll Compressor Shipping Hardware for 70 through 105 Ton Units
Figure 3-7C
Removing Scroll Compressor Shipping Hardward for 115 and 130 Ton Units
28
Installation (Continued)
Removing Supply and Exhaust Fan Shipping Channels
(Motors >5Hp)
2. Elevate the fan-and-motor assembly and slide the shipping
channels out from between the fan assembly rails and the
unit's base rail.
Each supply fan assembly and exhaust fan assembly for
S_HF units shipped with a motor larger than 5 HP is
equipped with rubber isolators, (as standard), or optional
spring isolators. Each supply fan assembly and exhaust fan
assembly for S_HG units is equipped with spring isolators.
Shipping channels are installed beneath each fan assembly
and must be removed. To locate and remove these chan-
nels, refer to Figure 3-8 and use the following procedures.
3. Lower the fan-and-motor assembly onto the isolators.
Make sure that the pins at the top of the isolators are en-
gaged in the corresponding holes on the fan assembly.
4. Verify that the fan assembly is being supported by the iso-
lators.
Rubber Isolators:
1. Remove and discard the shipping bolts from the fan as-
Spring Isolators:
Spring isolators for the supply and/or exhaust fan are
shipped with the isolator adjusting bolt backed out. Field
adjustment is required for proper operation. Figure 3-8
shows isolator locations. To adjust the spring isolators
use the following procedure.
sembly rails.
1. Remove and discard the shipping tie down bolts but
leave the shipping channels in place during the adjust-
ment procedure. See Figure 3-8.
2. Tighten the leveling bolt on each isolator until the fan
assembly is approximately 1/4" above each shipping
channel.
3. Secure the lock nut on each isolator.
4. Remove the shipping channels and discard.
29
Figure 3-8
Removing Fan Assembly Shipping Hardware (20 through 75 Ton)
Note: Fan assemblies not equipped with rubber or spring isolators have mounting bolts at the same locations
and must not be removed.
(90 through 130 Ton)
30
Installation (Continued)
Figure 3-9
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation
An Outside Air Pressure Sensor is shipped with all units de-
signed to operate on variable air volume applications or
constant volume units with 100% modulating exhaust w/
Stratitrac.
On VAV systems, a duct pressure transducer (3U60) and
the outside air sensor is used to control the discharge duct
static pressure to within a customer-specified parameter.
On CV & VAV units equipped with 100% modulating ex-
haust w/Stratitrac, a space pressure transducer (3U62) and
the outside air sensor is used to control the exhaust fan and
dampers to relieve static pressure, to within a customer-
specified parameter, within the controlled space. Refer to
Figure 3-9 and the following steps to install the sensor and
the pneumatic tubing.
1. Remove the O/A pressure sensor kit located inside the
filter section. The kit contains the following items;
O/A static pressure sensor with sensor mounting
bracket
2' of 3/16" O.D. pneumatic tubing
Mounting hardware
2. Using two #10-32 x 1-3/4" screws provided, install the
sensor's mounting bracket to the factory installed bracket
(near the filter section).
3. Using the #10-32 x 1/2" screws provided, install the O/A
static pressure sensor vertically to the sensor bracket.
4. Remove the dust cap from the tubing connector located
below the sensor in the vertical support.
5. Attach one end of the 2' x 3/16" O.D. factory provided
pneumatic tubing to the sensor's top port, and the other
end of the tubing to the connector in the vertical support.
Discard any excess tubing.
Units with StatitracTM:
6. Open the filter access door, and locate the DSP control
devices illustrated in Figure 3-9. There are three tube
connectors mounted on the left of the solenoid and
transducers. Connect one end of the field provided 3/16"
O.D. pneumatic tubing for the space pressurization con-
trol to the bottom fitting. Route the opposite end of the
tubing to a suitable location inside the building. This lo-
cation should be the largest open area that will not be af-
fected by sudden static pressure changes.
31
Installation (Continued)
6. Install a pressure regulator at the unit that is adequate to
maintain 7" w.c. for natural gas while the furnace is oper-
ating at full capacity.
Gas Heat Units (SFH_)
All internal gas piping is factory-installed and pressure leak-
tested before shipment. Once the unit is set into place, the
gas supply line must be field-connected to the elbow lo-
cated inside the gas heat control compartments.
Note: Gas pressure in excess of 14" w.c. or 0.5 psig
will damage the gas train.
Failure to use a pressure regulating device will result in in-
correct gas pressure. This can cause erratic operation due
to gas pressure fluctuations as well as damage the gas
valve.
WARNING
Hazardous Gases and Flammable Vapors!
Exposure to hazardous gases from fuel substances
have been shown to cause cancer, birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Improper installation, adjust-
ment, alteration, service or use of this product could
cause flammable mixtures. To avoid hazardous gases
and flammable vapors follow proper installation and set
up of this product and all warnings as provided in this
manual. Failure to follow all instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
Over sizing the regulator will cause irregular pulsating flame
patterns, burner rumble, potential flame outages, and pos-
sible gas valve damage.
If a single pressure regulator serves more than one rooftop
unit, it must be sized to ensure that the inlet gas pressure
does not fall below 7" w.c. with all the furnaces operating at
full capacity. The gas pressure must not exceed 14" w.c.
when the furnaces are off.
When using dry nitrogen cylinders for pressurizing
units for leak testing, always provide a pressure regula-
tor on the cylinder to prevent excessively high unit
pressures. Never pressurize unit above the maximum
recommended unit test pressure as specified in appli-
cable unit literature. Failure to properly regulate pres-
sure could result in a violent explosion, which could re-
sult in death or serious injury or equipment or prop-
erty-only-damage. (add when appropriate: See maxi-
mum recommended unit test pressure below.)
7. Provide adequate support for all field installed gas piping
to avoid stressing the gas train and controls.
8. Leak test the gas supply line using a soap-and-water so-
lution or equivalent before connecting it to the gas train.
9. Check the supply pressure before connecting it to the
unit to prevent possible gas valve damage and the un-
safe operating conditions that will result.
Access holes are provided on the unit as illustrated in Fig-
ure 3-2B to accomodate a side or bottom pipe entry on 20
through 75 Ton units and Figure 3-2C for bottom entry on
90 through 130 Ton units. Following the guidelines listed
below will enhance both the installation and operation of the
furnace.
Note: Do not rely on the gas train shutoff valves to
isolate the unit while conducting gas pressure/leak
test. These valves are not designed to withstand
pressures in excess of 14" w.c. or 0.5 psig.
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace Gas
Train
Note: In the absence of local codes, the installation
must conform with the American National Standard
Z223-1a of the National Fuel Gas Code, (latest
edition).
Follow the steps below to complete the installation between
the supply gas line and the furnace. Refer to Figure 3-10 for
the appropriate gas train configuration.
1. To assure sufficient gas pressure at the unit, use Table 3-
4 as a guide to determine the appropriate gas pipe size
for the unit heating capacity listed on the unit's name-
plate.
1. Connect the supply gas piping using a "ground-joint" type
union to the furnace gas train and check for leaks.
2. Adjust the inlet supply pressure to the recommended 7"
to 14" w.c. parameter for natural gas.
2. If a gas line already exist, verify that it is sized large
enough to handle the additional furnace capacity before
connecting to it.
3. Ensure that the piping is adequately supported to avoid
gas train stress.
3. Take all branch piping from any main gas line from the
top at 90 degrees or at 45 degrees to prevent moisture
from being drawn in with the gas.
4. Ensure that all piping connections are adequately coated
with joint sealant and properly tightened. Use a piping
compound that is resistant to liquid petroleum gases.
5. Provide a drip leg near the unit.
32
Installation (Continued)
Table 3-4
Sizing Natural Gas Pipe Mains & Branches
Sizing Natural Gas Pipe Mains & Branches
Gas Input (Cubic Feet/Hour)*
Notes:
1. If more than one unit is served by
the same main gas supply, consider
the total gas input (cubic feet/hr.)
and the total length when determining
the appropriate gas pipe size.
2. Obtain the Specific Gravity and
BTU/Cu.Ft. from the gas company.
3. The following example demonstrates
the considerations necessary when
determining the actual pipe size.
Gas Supply 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
Pipe Run (ft) Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe
2" 2-1/2"
3"
4"
1050 1600 3050 4800 8500 17500
730 1100 2100 3300 5900 12000
10
20
590
500
440
400
370
350
320
305
275
250
225
210
890 1650 2700 4700 9700
760 1450 2300 4100 8300
670 1270 2000 3600 7400
610 1150 1850 3250 6800
560 1050 1700 3000 6200
530
490
460
410
380
350
320
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
125
150
175
200
990 1600 2800 5800
930 1500 2600 5400
870 1400 2500 5100
780 1250 2200 4500
710 1130 2000 4100
650 1050 1850 3800
Example: A40' pipe run is needed to
connect a unit with a 500 MBH furnace to a
natural gas supply having a rating of 1,000
BTU/Cu.Ft. and a specific gravity of 0.60
610
980 1700 3500
Cu.Ft/Hour = Furnace MBH Input
Gas BTU/Cu.Ft. X Multiplier (Table 3-1)
Cu.Ft/Hour = 500
* Table is based on a specific gravity of 0.60. Use Table 3-1 for
specific gravity of the local gas supply.
Table 3 indicates that a 1-1/4" pipe is required.
Specific Gravity Multipliers
Specific
Gravity
0.50
Gas Heating Capacity Altitude Correction Factors
Multiplier
1.10
Altitude (Ft.)
Sea Level
2001
2501
3501
4501
5501
6501
0.55
1.04
To 2000
To 2500 To 3500 To 4500 To 5500 To 6500 To 7500
0.60
1.00
Capacity
0.65
0.96
Multiplier
1.00
.92
.88
.84
.80
.76
.72
Note: Correction factors are per AGA Std. 221.30 - 1964, Part VI, 6.12.
Local codes may supersede.
Figure 3-10
Unit Gas Trains (Natural Gas)
500 and 850 MBH
235 and 350 MBH
33
Installation (Continued)
Figure 3-10 (Continued)
Unit Gas Trains (Natural Gas)
4. Insert the tube on the flue assembly into the hole located
in the vertical support for the heat section.
5. Butt both flue tube sections together and center the pipe
clamp over joint.
1000 MBH
6. Using the pre-punch holes in the flue assembly, exten-
sion, and the vertical support, install the appropriate
number of mounting brackets. Refer to Figure 3-11 for
details.
Figure 3-11
Flue Assembly
Modulating (500 MBH - 1000 MBH)
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_)
Hot water heating coils are factory installed inside the
heater section of the unit. Once the unit is set into place,
the hot water piping and the factory provided three way
modulating valve must be installed. The valve can be in-
stalled inside the heat section or near the unit. If the valve
is installed in a remote location, use field supplied wiring to
extend the control wires from the heater section to the
valve. Two access holes are provided in the unit base as il-
lustrated in Figure 3-2.
Following the guidelines listed below will enchance both the
installation and operation of the "wet heat" system.
Figure 3-12 illustrates the recommended piping configura-
tion for the hot water coil. Table 3-5 list the coil connection
sizes.
Note: The valve actuators are not waterproof.
Failure to protect the valve from moisture may
result in the loss of heating control.
Flue Assembly Installation
1. Locate the flue assembly and the extension (refer to Fig-
ure 3-11 for extension usage) in the shipwith section of
the unit.
1. Support all field-installed piping independently from the
heating coil.
2. Install the flue extension onto the flue assembly as
shown in Figure 3-11.
2. Use swing joints or flexible connectors adjacent to the
heating coil. (These devices will absorb the strains of ex-
pansion and contraction).
3. Slide the pipe clamp onto the heater flue tube located in-
side the heater compartment.
3. All return lines and fittings must be equal to the diameter
of the "outlet" connection on the hot water coil.
34
Installation (Continued)
use field supplied wiring to extend the control wires from
the heater section to the valve. Two access holes are pro-
vided in the unit base as illustrated in Figure 3-2.
4. Install a "Gate" type valve in the supply branch line as
close as possible to the hot water main and upstream of
any other device or takeoff.
Following the guidelines listed below will enhance both the
installation and operation of the "wet heat" system.
Figure 3-13 illustrates the recommended piping configura-
tions for the steam coil. Table 3-5 list the coil connection
sizes.
5. Install a "Gate" type valve in the return branch line as
close as possible to the return main and down stream of
any other device.
6. Install a strainer in the hot water supply branch as shown
in Figure 3-12.
Note: The valve actuators are not waterproof.
Failure to protect the valve from moisture may
result in the loss of heating control.
7. Install the 3-way valve in an upright position, piped for
valve seating against the flow. Ensure that the valve's lo-
cation lends itself to serviceability.
1. Support all field-installed piping independently from the
heating coil.
8. The Type "W" hot water coil used in SLHF units is self-
venting only when the tube water velocity exceeds 1.5
feet per second (fps). If the tube velocity is less than 1.5
feet per second, either:
2. Use swing joints or flexible connectors adjacent to the
heating coil. (These devices will absorb the strains of ex-
pansion and contraction.)
a. install an automatic air vent at the top of the return
header, using the tapped pipe connection;
3. Install the 2-way valve in an upright position. Ensure that
the valve's location lends itself to serviceability.
or,
4. Pitch the supply and return steam piping downward 1"
per 10' of run in the direction of flow.
b. vent the coil from the top of the return header down
to the return piping. At the vent connection, size the
return piping to provide sufficient water velocity.
5. All return lines and fittings must be equal to the diameter
of the "outlet" connection on the steam coil(s). If the
steam trap connection is smaller that the coil "outlet" di-
ameter, reduce the pipe size between the strainer and
the steam trap connections only.
9. Install a "Globe" type valve in the Bypass line as shown
in Figure 3-12.
Table 3-5
Connection Sizes for Hot Water & Steam Coil
(See Note 1)
6. Install a 1/2" 15 degree swing-check vacuum breaker at
the top of the return coil header using the tapped pipe
connection. Position the vacuum breaker as close to the
coil as possible.
Heat
Coil Connections
Section
Capacity
(Note 2)
High or
Low Heat
High or
(diameter in inches)
Unit Model
and Size
SLH*-20
to 130
SSHF-20
to 30
Supply
Return
Note: Vacuum breakers should have extended lines
from the vent ports to the atmosphere or connect
each vent line to the return pipe on the discharge
side of the steam traps.
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
Low Heat
High Heat
3"
3"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
7. Install a "Gate" type valve in the supply branch line as
close as possible to the steam main and upstream of any
other device.
SSHF-40
to 75
(Note 3)
SSHG-90
to 130
Low Heat
Low Heat
(Note 3)
1-1/2"
1"
8. Install a "Gate" type valve in the return branch line as
close as possible to the condensate return main and
downstream of any other device.
Notes:
1. Type W coils—with center offset headers—are used in
SLH_ units; Type NS coils are used in SSH_ units.
2. See Digit 9 of the unit model number to determine the
heating capacity.
9. Install a strainer as close as possible to the inlet of the
control valve and steam trap(s).
10. Steam trap selection should be based on the maximum
possible condensate flow and the recommended load
factors.
3. SSH_ - 40 to 130 Ton units have multiple headers.
Steam Heat Units (SSH_)
11. Install a Float-and-Thermostatic (FT) type trap to main-
tain proper flow. They provide gravity drains and continu-
ous discharge operation. FT type traps are required if the
system includes either;
Steam heating coils are factory installed inside the heater
section of the unit. The coils are pitched, within the units, to
provide the proper condensate flow from the coil. To main-
tain the designed degree of pitch for the coil, the unit must
be level.
a. an atmospheric pressure/gravity condensate return;
Once the unit is set into place, the steam piping and the
factory provided two way modulating valve must be in-
stalled. The valve can be installed inside the heater section
or near the unit. If the valve is installed in a remote location,
or,
b. a potentially low pressure steam supply.
35
Installation (Continued)
13. Install a strainer in each return line before the steam
trap.
12. Position the outlet or discharge port of the steam trap at
least 12" below the outlet connection on the coil(s). This
will provide adequate hydrostatic head pressure to over-
come the trap losses and assure complete condensate
removal.
14. Trap each steam coil separately as described in steps
10 and 11 to prevent condensate backup in one or both
coils.
40 through 130 Ton units;
15. In order to prevent condensate backup in the piping
header suppling both coil sections, a drain must be in-
stalled utilizing a strainer and a steam trap as illustrated
in Figure 3-13.
Utilizes two steam coils stacked together. These two coils
must be piped in a parallel arrangement. The steps listed
below should be used in addition to the previous steps. Fig-
ure 3-13 illustrates the recommended piping configuration
for the steam coils.
Figure 3-12
Hot Water Piping (20 through 75 Ton)
Hot Water Piping (90 through 130 Ton)
36
Figure 3-13
Steam Coil Piping (20 through 30 Ton Units)
Steam Coil Piping (40 through 130 Ton Units)
37
Installation (Continued)
handling live electrical components perform these
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions
when exposed to live electrical components could result
Disconnect Switch External Handle
(Factory Mounted Option)
Units ordered with the factory mounted disconnect switch
comes equipped with an externally mounted handle. This
allows the operator to disconnect power from the unit with-
out having to open the control panel door. The handle loca-
tions and its three positions are shown below;
"ON" - Indicates that the disconnect switch is closed,
allowing the main power supply to be applied at the
unit.
in death or serious injury.
Verify that the power supply available is compatible with
the unit's nameplate rating for all components. The avail-
able power supply must be within 10% of the rated voltage
stamped on the nameplate. Use only copper conductors to
connect the 3-phase power supply to the unit.
"OFF" - Indicates that the disconnect switch is open,
interrupting the main power supply to the unit
controls.
"OPEN COVER/RESET" - Turning the handle to this
position releases the handle from the disconnect
switch, allowing the control panel door to be
opened.
CAUTION
Use Copper Conductors Only!
Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of
conductors. Failure to use copper conductors may re-
sult in equipment damage.
Electric Heat Units (SEH_)
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
SEHF (20 through 75 Ton) electric heat units operating on
200/230 volts require two power supplies as illustrated in
Figure 3-14. Unless the unit was ordered with the optional
factory mounted non-fused disconnect switches, two field-
supplied disconnect switches must be installed. The power
wires for the electric heat is routed into the electric heat
control panel using the thru-the-base access provided in the
heating section. Refer to the appropriate illustration in Fig-
ure 3-2, (Unit Base layout and Electrical Entrance diagram),
for dimensional data.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
Once the door has been opened, it can be closed with the
handle in any one of the three positions outlined above,
provided it matches the disconnect switch position.
20 through 75 Ton units operating on 460/575 volts and all
90 through 130 Ton units require one power entry as illus-
trated in Figure 3-14.
Use the information provided in Table 3-7 and the "Power
Wire Sizing & Protection Device Equations", to determine
the appropriate wire size and Maximum Over current Pro-
tection for the heaters/unit.
The handle can be locked in the "OFF" position. While
holding the handle in the "OFF" position, push the spring
loaded thumb key, attached to the handle, into the base
slot. Place the lock shackle between the handle and the
thumb key. This will prevent it from springing out of posi-
tion.
An overall layout of the field required power wiring is illus-
trated in Figure 3-14. T insure that the unit's supply power
wiring is properly sized and installed, follow the
guildelines outlined below.
Note: Each power supply must be protected from
short circuit and ground fault conditions. To
comply with NEC, protection devices must be sized
according to the "Maximum Over current
Protection" (MOP) or "Recommended Dual
Element" (RDE) fuse size data on the unit
nameplate.
Provide grounding for the supply power circuit in the elec-
tric heat control box.
Main Unit Power Wiring
Table 3-6 list the field connection wire ranges for both the
main power terminal block 1TB1 and the optional main
power disconnect switch 1S14. Table 3-7 list the compo-
nent electrical data for 20 through 130 Ton units. The elec-
trical service must be protected from over current and short
circuit conditions in accordance with NEC requirements.
Protection devices must be sized according to the electri-
cal data on the nameplate. Refer to the "Power Wire Sizing
& Protection Device Equations", for determining;
Note: All field installed wiring must conform to NEC guide-
lines as well as State and Local codes.
a. the appropriate electrical service wire size based on
"Minimum Circuit Ampacity" (MCA),
b. the "Maximum Over current Protection" (MOP)
device,
c. the "Recommended Dual Element fuse size" (RDE).
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in
38
Installation (Continued)
2. If the unit is not equipped with an optional factory in-
stalled non-fused disconnect switch, a field supplied dis-
connect switch must be installed at or near the unit in ac-
cordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest
edition). Refer to the "Power Wire Sizing & Protection De-
vice Equations" (DSS calculation), for determining the
correct size.
3. Location for the electrical service entrance is illustrated in
Figure 3-2. Complete the unit's power wiring connections
onto either the main terminal block 1TB1, or the factory
mounted non-fused disconnect switch 1S14, inside the
unit control panel. Refer to the customer connection dia-
gram that shipped with the unit for specific termination
points.
4. Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with
local and national codes.
Figure 3-14
Typical Field Power Wiring (20 thru 75 Ton)
39
Figure 3-14 (Continued)
Typical Field Power Wiring (90 thru 130 Ton)
Table 3-6
Customer Connection Wire Range
40
Table 3-7
Electrical Service Sizing Data (20 through 130 Ton)
Unit
Component(s)
200/60/3, Nominal
(180-220V Utiliz.)
230/60/3, Nominal
(207-253V Utiliz.)
460/60/3, Nominal
(414-506V Utiliz.)
575/60/3, Nominal
(517-633V Utiliz.)
RLA (ea) LRA (ea) RLA(ea) LRA (ea) RLA (ea) LRA (ea) RLA (ea) LRA (ea)
Compressor:
20
25
A & B
B
A
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
269
409
269
409
269
409
269
409
409
269
409
269
409
269
409
269
409
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
41.9
62.8
251
376
251
376
251
376
251
376
376
251
376
251
376
251
376
251
376
18.2
27.3
18.2
27.3
18.2
27.3
18.2
27.3
27.3
18.2
27.3
18.2
27.3
18.2
27.3
18.2
27.3
117
178
117
178
117
178
117
178
178
117
178
117
178
117
178
117
178
14.6
21.8
14.6
21.8
14.6
21.8
14.6
21.8
21.8
14.6
21.8
14.6
21.8
14.6
21.8
14.6
21.8
94
143
94
143
94
143
94
143
143
94
143
94
143
94
143
94
30
40
50
A & B
1,2A, 1,2B
1B & 2B
1A & 2A
1,2A, 1,2B
1,2A, 1,2B
1,2A, 1,2B
1,2C
55
60
70
75
75
90
1,2A, 1,2B
1,2C
Hi-Cap 1,2A, 1,2B
1,2C
1,2A
1,2B &
143
1,2C
1,2A
1,2B
1,2C
1,2A &
1,2B
1,2C &
1,2D
105
115
62.8
409
62.8
376
27.3
178
21.8
143
62.8
41.9
409
269
409
62.8
41.9
376
251
376
27.3
18.2
178
117
178
21.8
14.6
143
94
130
1,2A,B,C,D
62.8
Total FLA (1)
8.2
62.8
Total FLA (1)
8.2
27.3
Total FLA (1)
21.8
Total FLA (1)
143
Condenser Fans:
20 Ton - 2 fans
25/30 Ton - 3 fans
40 Ton - 4 fans
50 - 75 Ton, 6 fans
90 Ton, 8 fans
105 & 115 Ton, 10
fans
3.6
5.4
7.2
10.8
14.4
24
2.8
4.2
5.6
8.4
11.2
14
12.3
16.4
24.6
32.8
12.3
16.4
24.6
32.8
41
41
130 Ton, 12 fans
Supply Fan Motor
Horsepower:
3.0 HP
5.0 HP
7.5 HP
49.2
FLA (ea.)
49.2
FLA (ea.)
28.8
FLA (ea.)
16.8
FLA (ea.)
10.4
16
24.8
30.6
44.9
57.5
75
81
121
FLA
9
14.2
21.6
26.6
40
51
65
74
105.8
FLA
4.5
7.1
10.8
13.3
20
25.5
32.5
37
52.9
FLA
3.8
5.8
8.6
10.6
15.6
20.5
26
31
42.4
FLA
10.0 HP
15.0 HP (2)
20.0 HP (2)
25.0 HP (2)
30.0 HP (2)
40.0 HP (2)
Exhaust Fan Motor
Horsepower:
1.5 HP
3.0 HP
5.0 HP
7.5 HP
10.0 HP
5.5
10.4
16
24.8
30.6
44.9
57.5
75
4.8
9
14.2
21.6
26.6
40
51
65
74
2.4
4.5
7.1
10.8
13.3
20
25.5
32.5
37
1.9
3.8
5.8
8.6
10.6
15.6
20.5
26
15.0 HP
20.0 HP
25-HP
30-HP
81
31
40-HP
121
105.8
52.9
42.4
Notes:
1. “Full load amp” values represents the total condenser fan amps.
2. Two (2) motors are used on 90 through 130 Ton units.
41
Table 3-7 (Continued)
Electrical Service Sizing Data (20 through 130 Ton)
Unit
200/60/3, Nominal
(180-220V Utiliz.)
FLA (3)
230/60/3, Nominal
(207-253V Utiliz.)
FLA (3)
460/60/3, Nominal 575/60/3, Nominal
(414-506V Utiliz.) (517-633V Utiliz.)
Component(s)
Electric Heat
(SEHFOnly):
30 Kw
50 Kw
70 Kw
90 Kw
110 Kw
130 Kw
150 Kw
170 Kw
190 Kw
Combustion
Blower Motor
(SFHFOnly):
235, 350, 500 MB
850 & 1,000 MBh
FLA (3)
FLA (3)
83.3
138.8
194.3
249.8
305.3
-n/a-
-n/a-
-n/a-
-n/a-
FLA
72.2
120.3
168.4
216.5
264.6
-n/a-
-n/a-
-n/a-
-n/a-
FLA
36.1
60.1
28.9
48.1
84.2
67.4
108.3
132.3
156.4
180.4
204.5
228.5
FLA
86.6
105.9
125.1
144.3
163.6
182.8
FLA
2.1
2.8
1.8
2.4
0.9
1.2
0.7
1
Unit Tonnage
20 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Two
25 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity
No. of Compressors Tonnage
Type
Scrolls
Scroll
Designation
A& B
B
9 - Ton
14 - Ton
9 - Ton
One
One
Scroll
A
30 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Two
40 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Four
50 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Two
Two
14 - Ton
9 - Ton
14 - Ton
9 - Ton
14 - Ton
14 - Ton
9 - Ton
14 - Ton
10 - Ton
15- Ton
10 - Ton
15 - Ton
15 - Ton
15 - Ton
10 - Ton
14 - Ton
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
Scrolls
A& B
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B
1B & 2B
1A & 2A
55 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Four
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B
1 C & 2C
1A & 2A, 1B & 2B
1C, 2C
60Ton Std and Hi-Capacity
70 / 75 Ton Std
Four
Four
Two
Four
Two
Two
Four
Six
75 Ton Hi-Capacity
90 Ton
1A & 2A
1 ,2B & 1,2C
1,2A, 1,2B, 1,2C
1,2A& 1,2B
1,2C & 1,2D
1,2A, 1,2B, 1,2C, 1,2D
105 Ton
115 Ton
Four
Four
Eight
130 Ton
Note:
3. "Full load amp" values shown for the electric heat were determined at 480 and 600 volts, respectively.
42
Figure 3-15 Power Wire Sizing and Protection Device Equations
To correctly size the main power wiring for the unit, use the appropriate calculation(s) listed below. Read the load definitions
that follow and use Calculation #1 for determining the MCA (Minimum Circuit Ampacity), MOP (Maximum Over current Pro-
tection), and RDE (Recommended Dual Element fuse size) for SAH_ (Cooling Only) units, SXH_ (Extended Casing) units,
SLH_ and SSH_ (Cooling with Wet Heat) units, and SFH_ (Cooling with Gas Heat) units Use Calculation #2 for SEH_ (Cool-
ing with electric Heat) units.
Load Definitions:
LOAD 1 = CURRENT OF THE LARGEST MOTOR (COMPRESSOR OR FAN MOTOR)
LOAD 2 = SUM OF THE CURRENTS OF ALL REMAINING MOTORS
LOAD 3 = CURRENT OF ELECTRIC HEATERS
LOAD 4 = ANY OTHER LOAD RATED AT 1 AMP OR MORE
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER FOR ALL MODES
- 20 - 40 Ton Units, add 3 FL Amps
- 50 - 75 Ton Units, add 6 FL Amps
- 90 - 130 Ton Units, Add 8 FL Amps
CRANKCASE HEATERS FOR HEATING MODE 460/575V ONLY
- 20 - 30 Ton Units, Add 1 Amp
- 40 - 60 Ton Units, Add 2 Amps
- 70 - 105 Ton Units, Add 3 Amps
- 115 - 130 Ton Units, Add 4 Amps
Calculation #1 - SAH_, SXH_, SLH_, SSH_, and SFH_ Units.
MCA = (1.25 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4
MOP = (2.25 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4
Select a fuse rating equal to the MOP value. If the MOP value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,
select the next lower standard fuse rating.
Note: If selected MOP is less than the MCA, then select the lowest standard maximum fuse size which is equal
to or larger than the MCA, provided the selected fuse size does not exceed 800 amps.
RDE = (1.5 x LOAD1) + LOAD2 + LOAD4
Select a fuse rating equal to the RDE value. If the RDE value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,
select the next higher standard fuse rating.
Note: If the selected RDE is greater than the selected MOP value, then select the RDE value to equal the MOP
value.
Calculation #2 - Rooftop units with Electric Heat (SEH_ 20 - 130 Tons)
A. Single Source Power (380V, 415V, 460V, and 575V)
To arrive at the correct MCA, MOP, and RDE values for these units, you must perform two sets of calculations. First calculate
the MCA, MOP, and RDE values as if the unit was operating in the cooling mode (use the equations given in Calculation #1
above). Then calculate the MCA, MOP, and RDE values as if the unit was operating in the heating mode as follows. (Keep in
mind when determining LOADS that the compressors do not operate while the unit is in the heating mode).
For units using heaters less than 50 kw: MCA = 1.25 x (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4) + (1.25 x LOAD 3)
For units using heaters equal to or greater than 50 kw: MCA = 1.25 x (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4) + LOAD 3
The nameplate MCA value will be the larger of the cooling mode MCA value or the heating mode MCA value calculated
above.
MOP = (2.25 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 3 + LOAD 4
The selected MOP value will be the larger of the cooling mode MOP value or the heating mode MOP value calculated above.
Select a fuse rating equal to the MOP value. If the MOP value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,
select the next lower standard fuse rating.
Note: If selected MOP is less than the MCA, then select the lowest standard maximum fuse size which is equal
to or larger than the MCA, provided the selected fuse size does not exceed 800 amps.
Continued on the Next Page
43
Power Wire Sizing and Protection Device Equations (Continued)
RDE = (1.5 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 3 + LOAD 4
The selected RDE value will be the larger of the cooling mode RDE value or the heating mode RDE value calculated above.
Select a fuse rating equal to the RDE value. If the RDE value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,
select the next higher standard fuse rating.
Note: If the selected RDE is greater than the selected MOP value, then select the RDE value to equal the MOP
value.
B. Dual Source Power units (200V and 230V)
These units will have two circuit values shown on the nameplate. The first circuit value will be the refrigeration (cooling mode)
values calculated using calculation #1 above. The second set of circuit values shown on the nameplate will be for the electric
heating circuit as follows.
MCA = (1.25 x LOAD 3)
MOP = (1.25 x LOAD 3)
Select a fuse rating for the electric heating circuit that’s equal to the MOP value obtained in the equation above. If the MOP
value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6, select the next lower standard fuse rating (see note be-
low for exception).
Note: If selected MOP is less than the MCA obtained in the equation above, then select the lowest standard
maximum fuse size which is equal to or larger than the MCA, provided the selected fuse size does not exceed
800 amps.
RDE = LOAD 3
Select a fuse rating for the electric heating circuit that’s equal to the RDE value. If the RDE value does not equal a standard
fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6, select the next higher standard fuse rating.
Note: If the selected RDE is greater than the selected MOP value, then select the RDE value to equal the MOP
value.
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)
Calculation #1 - SX, SF, SA, SL, or SS Single Power Source Units
DSS = 1.15 X (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4)
Calculation #2 - All SEH_ Single Power Source Units
DSS = 1.15 X (LOAD 3 + Supply Fan FLA + Exhaust Fan FLA)
PLUS
DSS = 1.15 X (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4)
Use the larger value of the two calculations to size the electrical service.
Calculation #3 - SEHF (200/230 Volt) 20 - 75 Ton Dual Power Source Units
DSS = 1.15 X LOAD3 for the Electric heater AND Calculation #1 for the Refrigeration Components
44
Installation (Continued)
Field Installed Control Wiring
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs
The Rooftop Module (RTM) must have a mode input in or-
der to operate the rooftop unit. The flexibility of having sev-
eral system modes depends upon the type of sensor and/or
remote panel selected to interface with the RTM. An overall
layout of the various control options available for a Constant
Volume application, with the required number of conductors
for each device, is illustrated in Figure 3-16. Figure 3-17 il-
lustrates the various control options with the required num-
ber of conductors for a Variable Air Volume application.
Before installing any connecting wiring between the unit and
components utilizing a DC analog input\output signal, refer
to the appropriate illustration in Figure 3-2 for the electrical
access locations provided on the unit and
Table 3-9 for conductor sizing guidelines and;
a. Use standard copper conductor thermostat wire
unless otherwise specified.
b. Ensure that the wiring between the controls and the
unit's termination point does not exceed two and a
half (2.5) ohms/conductor for the length of the run.
Note: All field wiring must conform to NEC
guidelines as well as state and local codes.
Note: Resistance in excess of 2.5 ohms per
conductor can cause deviations in the accuracy of
the controls.
The various field installed control panels, sensors, switches,
and contacts discussed in this section require both AC and
DC consideration. These diagrams are representative of
standard applications and are provided for general refer-
ence only. Always refer to the wiring diagram that shipped
with the unit for specific electrical schematic and connection
information.
Table 3-9
DC Conductors
Distance from Unit Recommended
to Control
000 - 150 feet
151 - 240 feet
241 - 385 feet
386 - 610 feet
611 - 970 feet
Wire Size
22 gauge
20 gauge
18 gauge
16 gauge
14 gauge
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
c. Do not run the electrical wires transporting DC
signals in or around conduit housing high voltage
wires.
Controls using 24 VAC
Units equipped with a Trane Communication Interface (TCI)
or LonTalk Communication Interface (LCI) option which uti-
lizes a serial communication link;
Before installing any connecting wiring, refer to Figure 3-2
for the electrical access locations provided on the unit and
Table 3-8 for AC conductor sizing guidelines, and;
a. Must be 18 AWG shielded twisted pair cable (Belden
8760 or equivalent).
a. Use copper conductors unless otherwise specified.
b. Must not exceed 5,000 feet maximum for each link.
c. Must not pass between buildings.
b. Ensure that the AC control wiring between the
controls and the unit's termination point does not
exceed three (3) ohms/conductor for the length of
the run.
Constant Volume System Controls
Note: Resistance in excess of 3 ohms per
conductor may cause component failure due to
insufficient AC voltage supply.
Remote Panel w/o NSB (5U56) - BAYSENS010B
This electronic sensor features four system switch settings
(Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and
Auto) with four system status LED's. It is a manual or auto-
matic changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can
be used with a remote zone sensor BAYSENS017B. Refer
to Table 3-10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.
c. Be sure to check all loads and conductors for
grounds, shorts, and miswiring.
Table 3-8
AC Conductors
Remote Panel w/ NSB (5U58) - BAYSENS019*
This 7 day programmable sensor features four periods for
Occupied\Unoccupied programming per day. If the power is
interrupted, the program is retained in permanent memory.
If power is off longer than 2 hours, only the clock and day
may have to be reset.
Distance from Unit Recommended
to Control
000 - 460 feet
461 - 732 feet
733 - 1000 feet
Wire Size
18 gauge
16 gauge
14 gauge
The six programming keys located on the front panel allows
selection of four system modes (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off),
two fan modes (On and Auto). It has dual temperature se-
lection with programmable start time capability.
d. Do not run the AC low voltage wiring in the same
conduit with the high voltage power wiring.
45
Installation (Continued)
The occupied cooling setpoint ranges between 40 and 80
Fahrenheit. The warm-up setpoint ranges between 50 and
90 degrees Fahrenheit with a 2 degrees deadband. The Un-
occupied cooling setpoint ranges between 45 and 98
degrees Fahrenheit. The heating setpoint ranges between
43 and 96 degrees Fahrenheit.
system operation, and monitor unit operating status from a
remote location. Use the installation instructions that
shipped with the panel to install it, and the unit's field wiring
diagram to connect it to the unit.
VAV Changeover Contacts (5K87)
These contacts are connected to the RTM when daytime
heating on VAV units with internal or external hydronic heat
is required. Daytime (occupied) heating switches the system
to a CV type mode of operation. Refer to the unit wiring dia-
gram for the field connection terminals in the unit control
panel. The switch must be rated at 12 ma @ 24 VDC mini-
mum.
Two liquid crystal displays (LCD) display zone temperature,
temperature setpoints, week day, time, and operational
mode symbols.
The DIP switches on the subbase are used to enable or dis-
able applicable functions, i.e.; Morning Warm-up, Econo-
mizer minimum CFM override during unoccupied status,
Fahrenheit or Centigrade, Supply air tempering, Remote
zone temperature sensor, 12/24 hour time display, Smart
fan, and Computed recovery.
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume
System Controls
Remote Human Interface Module (5U66)
During an occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated for 1.25
amps @ 30 volts AC with one set of single pole double
throw contacts is activated. See Table 3-10 for the Tempera-
ture vs Resistance coefficient.
The remote Human Interface module enables the operator
to set of modify the operating parameters of the unit using
it's 16 key keypad and view the operating status of the unit
on the 2 line, 40 character LCD screen without leaving the
building. However, the Remote Human Interface module can
not be used to perform any service functions.
Constant Volume Zone Panel (5U68) - BAYSENS008B
This electronic sensor features four system switch settings
(Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and
Auto). It is a manual or automatic changeover control with
dual setpoint capability.
One remote panel is designed to monitor and control up to
four units providing each of the units are equipped with an
IPCB module. Use the installation instructions that shipped
with the module to install it, and the appropriate illustrations
in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 to connect it to the unit.
Variable Air Volume System Controls
Remote Panel w/ NSB (5U58) - BAYSENS020B
This 7 day programmable sensor features four periods for
Occupied\Unoccupied programming per day. Either one or
all four periods can be programmed. If the power is inter-
rupted, the program is retained in permanent memory. If
power is off longer than 2 hours, only the clock and day may
have to be reset.
Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS013C)
This electronic analog sensor features remote zone sensing
and timed override with override cancellation. It is used
when the RTM has been programmed as the source for
zone temperature control. Refer to Table 3-10 for the Tem-
perature vs Resistance coefficient.
Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS014C)
The front panel allows selection of Occupied/Unoccupied
periods with two temperature inputs (Cooling Supply Air
Temperature and Heating Warm-up temperature) per occu-
pied period. The occupied cooling setpoint ranges between
40 and 80 Fahrenheit. The warm-up setpoint ranges be-
tween 50 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit with a 2 degrees
deadband. The Unoccupied cooling setpoint ranges be-
tween 45 and 98 degrees Fahrenheit. The heating setpoint
ranges between 43 and 96 degrees Fahrenheit.
This electronic analog sensor features single setpoint capa-
bility and timed override with override cancellation. It is used
with a Trane Integrated ComfortTM system. Refer to Table 3-
10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.
Remote Zone Sensor (5RT16, 5U57, and 5U69)
(BAYSENS016A)
This bullet type analog Temperature sensor can be used for;
outside air (ambient) sensing, return air temperature sens-
ing, supply air temperature sensing, remote temperature
sensing (uncovered), morning warm-up temperature sens-
ing, and for VAV zone reset. Wiring procedures vary accord-
ing to the particular application and equipment involved.
When this sensor is wired to a BAYSENS019* or
BAYSENS020* Remote Panel, wiring must be 18 AWG
Shielded Twisted Pair (Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to
Table 3-10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.
The liquid crystal display (LCD) displays zone temperature,
temperature setpoints, week day, time, and operational
mode symbols.
The DIP switches on the subbase are used to enable or dis-
able applicable functions, i.e.; Morning warm-up, econo-
mizer minimum position override during unoccupied status,
heat installed, remote zone temperature sensor, 12/24 hour
time display, and daytime warm-up. Refer to
Remote Zone Sensor (5RT16, 5U57, and 5U69)
(BAYSENS017B)
Table 3-10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.
This electronic analog sensor can be used with
BAYSENS019*, 020*, or 021A Remote Panels. When this
sensor is wired to a BAYSENS019* or BAYSENS020* Re-
mote Panel, wiring must be 18 AWG Shielded Twisted Pair
(Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to the specific Remote
Panel for wiring details.
During an occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated for 1.25
amps @ 30 volts AC with one set of single pole double
throw contacts is activated.
Remote Panel w/o NSB (5U59) - BAYSENS021A
The remote panel w/o Night setback has a system switch as
well as a S/A temperature setpoint indicator, a local sensor,
and four LED's. These features allow the operator to control
46
Installation (Continued)
4.VOM Mode “D” Priority 4 - Purge:
-Supply fan - ON
Remote Minimum Position Potentiometer (5U70)
(BAYSTAT023A)
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - 100% (if equipped)
-Exhaust fan - ON, Exhaust dampers - Open
-O/A dampers - Open
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output
at 0 vdc
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized
(Unoccupied)
The remote minimum position potentiometer is used on
units with an economizer. It allows the operator to remotely
set the economizer's minimum position (which controls the
amount of outside air entering the unit). Use the installation
instructions that shipped with the potentiometer to install it,
and the appropriate illustrations in Figure 3-16 or
3-17 to connect it to the unit.
-VO Relay - Energized
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)
External Auto/Stop Switch (5S67)
A field supplied single pole single throw switch (5S67) may
be used to shut down the unit operation. This switch is a bi-
nary input wired to the RTM. When opened, the unit shuts
down immediately and can be cancelled by closing the
switch. Refer to the appropriate illustrations in
Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the proper connection terminals in
the unit control panel. The switch must be rated for 12 ma
@ 24 VDC minimum.
5. VOM Mode “E” Priority 5 - Purge with duct pressure
control:
-Supply fan - ON
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - (if equipped) Controlled by
S/A Pressure Control with supply air pressure high
limit disabled.
-Exhaust fan - ON, Exhaust dampers - Open
-O/A dampers - Open
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output
at 0 vdc
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized
(Unoccupied)
-VO Relay - Energized
VOM Contacts (5K90, 5K91, 5K92, 5K93, 5K94)
If the unit is equipped with a Ventilation Override Module
(VOM), (i.e. unit model number digit 21+ is a “N”), a num-
ber of special functions can be specified by the building
owner or contractor. These functions can include, but are
not limited to; (1) Unit Off, (2) Pressurization, (3) Exhaust,
(4) Purge, and (5) Purge with Duct Pressure Control. They
are controlled by binary inputs wired to the VOM. These
functions can be initiated by; a toggle switch, a time clock,
or an ICSTM output. The switch must be rated for 12 ma @
24 VDC minimum. The following preset sequences can be
modified by the customer;
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)
"OFF" - will appear in the Ventilation Override screen after
all VOM binary inputs have been reset (opened).
Due to codes in some areas, the definitions for some or all
of the VOM modes may have to be locked into the program
by the user. Once the definitions are locked, the Ventilation
Override Module must be replaced in order to reprogram
that sequence.
1. VOM Mode “A” Priority 1 - Unit Off:
-Supply fan - OFF
Refer to Figure 3-16 & 3-17 for the proper connection termi-
nals in the unit control panel for each of the VOM initiating
device’s and the appropriate Programming, Troubleshooting
Guide (PTG Latest Edition) for programming instructions.
-Inlet vanes/VFD - 0% (if equipped)
-Exhaust fan - OFF, Exhaust dampers Closed
-O/A dampers - Closed
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output
at 0 vdc
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized
(Occupied)
-VO Relay - Energized
Emergency Override Definitions (with LCI-I module
installed)
When an LCI-I module is installed, the user can initiate one
of five (5) Emergency Override sqeuences that have the fol-
lowing predefined unit operation:
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)
2. VOM Mode “B” Priority 2 - Pressurize:
-Supply fan - ON
PRESSURIZE
Supply Fan - On
Inlet Vanes - Open (if equipped)
Exhaust Fan - Off (if equipped)
Exhaust Dampers - Closed (if equipped)
OA Dampers - Open
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.
Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - 100% (if equipped)
-Exhaust fan - OFF, Exhaust dampers - Closed
-O/A dampers - Open
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output
at 0 vdc
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized
(Unoccupied)
-VO Relay - Energized
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)
3. VOM Mode “C” Priority 3 - Exhaust:
-Supply fan - OFF
DEPRESSURIZE
Supply Fan - Off
Inlet Vanes - Closed (if equipped)
Exhaust Fan - On (if equipped)
Exhaust Dampers -Open (if equipped)
OA Dampers - Closed
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.
Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - 0% (if equipped)
-Exhaust fan - ON, Exhaust dampers - Open
-O/A dampers - Closed
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output
at 0 vdc
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized
(Occupied)
-VO Relay - Energized
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)
47
PURGE
Emergency Stop Switch (5S71)
Supply Fan - On
A normally closed (N.C.) switch (5S71) wired to the RTM
may be used during emergency situations to shut down all
unit operations. When opened, an immediate shutdown oc-
curs. An emergency stop diagnostic is entered into the Hu-
man Interface and the unit must be manually reset. Refer to
the appropriate illustrations in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the
proper connection terminals in the unit control panel. The
switch must be rated for 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum.
Inlet Vanes - Open (if equipped)
Exhaust Fan - On (if equipped)
Exhaust Dampers - Open (if equipped)
OA Dampers - Open
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.
Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)
Occupied/Unoccupied Contacts (5K86)
To provide Night Setback control if a remote panel with NSB
(5U58) was not ordered, a field supplied contact (5K86)
must be installed. This binary input provides the Occupied/
Unoccupied status information of the building to the RTM. It
can be initiated by a time clock, or a Building Automation
System control output. The relay’s contacts must be rated
for 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum. Refer to the appropriate il-
lustrations in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the proper connection
terminals in the unit control panel.
SHUTDOWN
Supply Fan - Off
Inlet Vanes - Closed (if equipped)
Exhaust Fan - Off (if equipped)
Exhaust Dampers - Closed (if equipped)
OA Dampers - Closed
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.
Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)
Demand Limit Relay (5K89)
If the unit is equipped with a Generic BAS Module (1U51),
(i.e. unit model number digit 21+ is a “K”), a normally open
(N.O.) switch may be used to limit the electrical power us-
age during peak periods. When demand limit is initiated, the
mechanical cooling and heating operation is limited to either
50% or 100%. Demand limit can be initiated by a toggle
switch closure, a time clock, or an ICSTM control output.
These contacts must be rated for 12 ma @ 24 VDC mini-
mum.
FIRE
Supply Fan - Off
Inlet Vanes - Closed (if equipped)
Exhaust Fan - Off (if equipped)
Exhaust Dampers - Closed (if equipped)
OA Dampers - Closed
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.
Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)
Outside Air Sensor (3RT3) - BAYSENS016A
This device senses the outdoor air temperature and sends
this information in the form of an analog input to the RTM.
It's factory installed on units with an economizer, but can be
field provided/installed and used for informational purposes
on units without an economizer. Refer to the appropriate il-
lustrations in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the proper connection
terminals in the unit control panel. Refer to Table 3-10 for
Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.
Table 3-10 - Temperature vs. Resistance Coefficient
The UCM network relies on various sensors located
throughout the system to provide temperature information in
the form of an analog input. All of the sensors used have
the same temperature vs. resistance co-efficient and are
made from Keystone Carbon D97 material with a 1 degree
Centigrade tolerance.
Generic Building Automation System (1U51)
Resistance
Resistance
The Generic Building Automation System (GBAS) module
allows a non-Trane building control system to communicate
with the rooftop unit and accepts external setpoints in form
of analog inputs for cooling, heating, demand limiting, and
supply air pressure parameters. Refer to Figure 3-18 for the
input wiring to the GBAS module and the various desired
setpoints with the corresponding DC voltage inputs for both
VAV and CV applications.
Temperature (F)
(in. 1000 Ohms)
Temperature (F)
(in. 1000 Ohms)
-40
-30
-20
-10
-5
0
5
346.1
241.7
170.1
121.4
103
87.56
74.65
63.8
54.66
46.94
40.4
34.85
30.18
26.22
22.85
19.96
17.47
15.33
13.49
13.15
12.82
12.5
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
85
11.6
11.31
11.03
10.76
10.5
10.25
10
9.76
9.53
9.3
8.25
7.33
5.82
5.21
4.66
3.76
3.05
2.5
2.05
1.69
1.4
1.17
0.985
0.83
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
66
67
68
69
70
For complete application details of the module, refer to
Engineering Bulletin UN-PRB001-EN.
90
100
105
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
12.19
11.89
48
Figure 3-16A
Typical Field Wiring Diagram for 20 through 130 Ton CV Control Options
Refer to Wiring Notes on page 51
49
Field Connection Diagram Notes for 20 through 130 Ton CV or VAV Applications
51
Figure 3-17A
Typical Field Wiring Diagram for 20 through 130 Ton VAV Control Option
Refer to Wiring Notes on page 51
52
Table of Contents
Section One
Section Four
About The Manual ...............................................................2
Literature Change History ................................................2
Overview of Manual .........................................................2
Cooling Sequence of Operation ....................................55
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation.............................56
Fenwal Ignition System ..................................................56
Honeywell Ignition System.............................................56
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation .......................57
Flame Failure .................................................................57
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation ............................58
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation ..................................58
Electrical Phasing ..........................................................59
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance .........................60
Service Test Guide for Component Operation...............61
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation .......................................63
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;........................63
System Airflow Measurements ......................................63
Constant Volume Systems.............................................63
Variable Air Volume Systems .........................................65
Exhaust Airflow Measurement .......................................66
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement ...........................66
Economizer Damper Adjustment ...................................80
Compressor Start-Up .....................................................82
Compressor Operational Sounds ..................................83
Thermostatic Expansion Valves.....................................93
Charging by Subcooling .................................................93
Low Ambient Dampers ...................................................93
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up ........................94
Gas Furnace Start-Up ....................................................94
Two Stage Gas Furnace ................................................95
Full Modulating Gas Furnace.........................................97
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace...................................98
Final Unit Checkout........................................................99
Section Two
General Information .............................................................4
Model Number Description ..............................................4
Hazard Identification ........................................................6
Commonly Used Acronyms .............................................6
Unit Description................................................................6
Input Devices & System Functions ..................................8
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units ................8
Constant Volume (CV) Units ..........................................10
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units .................................... 11
Space Temperature Averaging .......................................12
Unit Control Modules (UCM) ..........................................12
Section Three
Installation..........................................................................14
Unit Inspection ...............................................................14
Storage ...........................................................................14
Unit Clearances .............................................................14
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information ..........................14
Roof Curb and Ductwork ...............................................22
Pitch Pocket Location ....................................................23
Unit Rigging & Placement ..............................................23
General Unit Requirements ...........................................25
Main Electrical Power Requirements.............................25
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................25
Requirements for Electric Heat Units ............................25
Requirements for Gas Heat ...........................................25
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_) .....................25
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_) ..........................26
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation ...............26
Condensate Drain Connection.......................................27
Shipping Fasteners ........................................................27
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation ...................................31
Units with Statitrac™; ....................................................31
Gas Heat Units (SFH_) ..................................................32
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace
Section Five
Service & Maintenance....................................................100
Fan Belt Adjustment .....................................................104
Scroll Compressor Replacement .................................105
VFD Programming Parameters ...................................106
Monthly Maintenance ...................................................107
Filters............................................................................107
Cooling Season ............................................................107
Heating Season............................................................108
Coil Cleaning ................................................................108
Final Process ...............................................................109
Gas Train........................................................................32
Flue Assembly Installation .............................................34
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_) ........................................34
Steam Heat Units (SSH_) ..............................................35
Disconnect Switch External Handle...............................38
Electric Heat Units (SEH_) ............................................38
Main Unit Power Wiring .................................................38
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)....................................44
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................45
Controls using 24 VAC ...................................................45
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs.......................45
Constant Volume System Controls ................................45
Variable Air Volume System Controls ............................46
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume System
Index ............................................................................... 111
UV ................................................................................... 114
Warranty ......................................................................... 114
Controls ..........................................................................46
Unit Start-Up
door conditions are suitable for cooling (temperature and
humidity are within specified setpoints), the RTM will at-
tempt to maintain the zone temperature without using any
compressors. If the zone temperature can not be main-
tained within the setpoint deadband, the RTM sends a cool-
ing request to the SCM/MCM. The compressor module
checks the compressor protection circuit before closing
"Stage 1" (K10 on SCM or K11 on MCM). After the first
functional stage has started, the compressor module moni-
tors the saturated refrigerant temperature and closes the
condenser fan output contact "1A", when the saturated re-
frigerant temperature rises above the "lower limit" setpoint.
Cooling Sequence of Operation
Time delays are built into the controls to increase reliability
and performance by protecting the compressors and maxi-
mizing unit efficiency.
Sequence of Operation
Compressor Crankcase Heaters
Each compressor is equipped with a crankcase heater and
is controlled by a 600 volt auxiliary switch on the compres-
sor contactor. The proper operation of the crankcase heater
is important to maintain an elevated compessor oil tempera-
ture during the "Off" cycle to reduce oil foaming during com-
pressor starts.
Units with TraqTM Sensor
The fresh air enters the unit through the TraqTM Sensor as-
sembly and is measured by velocity pressure flow rings.
The velocity pressure flow rings are connected to a pres-
sure transducer/solenoid assembly. The solenoid is used for
calibration purposes to compensate for temperature swings
that could affect the transducer. The Ventilation Control
Module (VCM) utilizes the velocity pressure input, the RTM
outdoor air temperature input, and the minimum outside air
CFM setpoint to modify the volume (CFM) of fresh air enter-
ing the unit as the measured airflow deviates from setpoint.
When the compressor starts, the sudden reduction in crank-
case pressure causes the liquid refrigerant to boil rapidly
causing the oil to foam. This condition could damage com-
pressor bearings due to reduced lubrication and could
cause compressor mechanical failures.
When power has been "Off" for an extended period, allow
the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours be-
fore starting the unit.
When the optional temperature sensor is installed and the
Preheat function is enabled, the sensor will monitor the
combined (averaged) fresh air and return air temperatures.
As this mixed air temperature falls below the Preheat Actu-
ate Temperature Setpoint, the VCM will activate the preheat
binary output used to control a field installed heater. The
output will be deactivated when the temperature rises 5
above the Preheat Actuate Temperature Setpoint.
Units without an Economizer
Upon entering an "occupied" mode of operation, the RTM
receives input from the remote panel to start the supply fan.
For constant volume applications, the RTM supply fan con-
tacts K2 close which energizes the supply fan contactor
1K16. Units equipped with Inlet Guide Vanes (IGV), the fan
is delayed until the inlet guide vanes are driven to the full
closed position. When the supply fan starts, the fan proving
switch (3S68) closes, signaling the RTM that airflow has
been established. Inlet Guide Vanes will begin to drive open
(if equipped), or the VFD will begin to ramp the fan, (if
equipped).
When the optional CO sensor is installed and the CO2 Re-
set is enabled, as the 2CO concentration increases above
the CO2 Reset Start Value2, the VCM will modify the mini-
mum outside air CFM setpoint to increase the amount of
fresh air entering the unit. The setpoint will be adjusted up-
ward until the CO2 Maximum Reset Value is reached. The
maximum effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air enter-
ing the unit is limited to the systems operating CFM. As the
CO2 concentration decreases, the effective (reset) setpoint
value is adjusted downward toward the minimum outside air
CFM setpoint.
When a cooling request is sent to the RTM from a zone
temperature sensor, the RTM evaluates the operating con-
dition of the system using the supply air temperature input
and the outdoor temperature input before sending the re-
quest to the SCM/MCM. Once the request is sent to the
SCM/MCM, the compressor module checks the compressor
protection circuit before closing "Stage 1" (K10 on SCM or
K11 on MCM). After the first functional stage has started,
the compressor module monitors the saturated refrigerant
temperature and closes the condenser fan output contact
"1A", when the saturated refrigerant temperature rises
above the "lower limit" setpoint.
Units with an Economizer
Upon entering an "occupied" mode of operation, the RTM
receives input from the remote panel to start the supply fan.
For constant volume applications, the RTM supply fan con-
tacts K2 close which energizes the supply fan contactor
1K16. Units equipped with Inlet Guide Vanes (IGV), the fan
is delayed until the inlet guide vanes are driven to the full
closed position. When the supply fan starts, the fan proving
switch (3S68) closes, signaling the RTM that airflow has
been established. The RTM opens the economizer dampers
to the specified "minimum position".
FrostatTM Control
The compressor module utilizes an evaporator temperature
sensor (3RT14 & 15), mounted on the suction line of each
circuit, to protect the evaporator from freezing. If the evapo-
rator temperature approaches the specified setpoint, adjust-
able between 25 F and 35 F, the compressor(s) will be
cycled "off". The compressors will not be allowed to restart
until the evaporator temperature has risen 10 F above the
specified cutout temperature and the compressor(s) have
been off for a minimum of three minutes.
When a cooling request is sent to the RTM from the zone
temperature sensor, the RTM evaluates the operating con-
dition of the system using the supply air temperature input
and the outdoor temperature input before sending the re-
quest to the SCM/MCM for mechanical cooling. If the out-
55
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Lead/Lag Operation
When Lead/Lag is enabled, each time the system cycles af-
ter having stages 1 and 2 "On", "Stage 2" (K11 on SCM or
K3 on MCM) and the corresponding condenser fan output
"2A" will start first. The compressor module cycles the
compressors "On" and "Off" to keep the zone temperature
within the cooling setpoint deadband. The condenser fans
are cycled "On" and "Off" to maintain the saturated refriger-
ant temperature within the specified controlband.
If the flame rod (4U19) does not detect a flame at the time
of an initial call for heat or detects a loss of flame during
operation, it will de-energize the gas valve and the inter-
lock relay (4K32). The Fenwal ignition control board
(4U18) will lockout automatically. If a flame failure occurs
prior to the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) opening its
contacts which de-energizes the pre-purge timer (4DL5),
the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) will complete its
timing. When completed, the pre-purge time delay relay
(4DL5) is de-energized, opening its contacts which discon-
nects power to the ignition control board (4U18), the se-
quencing time delay relay (4DL6), and the 2nd stage sole-
noid on the gas valve (4L15). Once power is removed from
the ignition control board, it will reset automatically. If a call
for heat still exists, after approximately 60 seconds, the
contacts for the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) will
close, powering the pre-purge time delay circuit while tim-
ing open to the combustion blower relay (4K33) and the
2nd stage solenoid on the gas valve (4L15). The pre-purge
time delay relay (4DL5) will initiate another ignition se-
quence. The combustion blower motor will continue to op-
erate as long as a heating requirement exists and the ser-
vice switch (4S24) is "On".
Units equipped with 100% modulating exhaust
The exhaust dampers are controlled through an Exhaust/
Comparative Enthalpy Module (ECEM). The ECE module
receives input form a space transducer and modulates the
exhaust dampers to maintain the space pressure to within
the specified setpoint controlband.
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation
Standard Two Stage Gas Furnace
The control system for the rooftop units are wired to ensure
that the heating and cooling do not occur simultaneously.
Refer to the wiring diagram that shipped with the unit while
reviewing the following sequence of operation.
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the combus-
tion blower motor and the ignition control board is de-ener-
gized.
Fenwal Ignition System
(235 & 350 MBH Natural Gas)
When a heating requirement exists, the Rooftop Module
(RTM) starts the supply fan and sends a request for heat to
the Heat Module. The Heat Module closes K11 contacts
and starts the combustion blower motor (4B11). The com-
bustion blower motor starts on low speed through the nor-
mally closed combustion fan relay (4K33) contacts. The
heat module also closes K12 contacts. Power is then sup-
plied through the supply air flow switch (4S38), the com-
bustion air flow switch (4S25), the high limit cutout (4S26),
and finally through the normally closed sequencing time
delay (4DL6) contacts to the pre-purge time delay relay
(4DL5). The Fenwal ignition control board (4U18), the 60
second sequencing time delay relay (4DL6), and the com-
bustion blower relay (4K33) will not energize until the pre-
purge timer (4DL5) closes its contacts. Once closed, the
Fenwal ignition control board (4U18) energizes the 1st
stage solenoid on the gas valve (4L15), the interlock relay
(4K32), and the ignition electrode (4E1). A second set of
normally open timed closed contacts on the pre-purge
timer (4DL5) are wired into the 1U50 heat fail input in se-
ries with a normally closed set of contacts on the interlock
relay (4K32). When the commonly open contacts on the in-
terlock relay (4K32) closes, it will maintain an electrical
path for the ignition control board (4U18) and subsequent
controls after the pre-purge timer (4DL5) is de-energized
by the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6). The normally
open contacts on the pre-purge time delay relay (4DL5)
will open in the 1U50 heat fail input, preventing the Heat
Fail diagnostic.
Propane Gas
Units that operate on propane gas have one additional con-
trol that affects the combustion blower motor operation
when a heating demand has been initiated or satisfied.
The post purge time delay relay (4DL4) is installed which
delays the starting of the combustion blower by approxi-
mately 60 seconds. Once it has timed out, the combustion
blower motor will start, closing the combustion air flow
switch (4S25). The ignition sequence will follow the same
sequence from the combustion airflow switch (4S25) to the
subsequent controls as a natural gas system.
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the Fenwal
ignition control board (4U18) and the post purge time delay
relay (4DL4) is de-energized. The combustion blower motor
will continue to operate for approximately 15 seconds to
purge the heat exchanger on the "Off" cycle.
Honeywell Ignition System
(500 & 850 MBH Natural Gas)
When a heating requirement exists, the Rooftop Module
(RTM) starts the supply fan and sends a request for heat to
the Heat Module. The Heat Module closes K1 contacts and
starts the combustion blower motor (4B11). The combustion
blower motor starts on low speed through the normally
closed combustion blower relay (4K33) contacts.
The supply airflow switch (4S38) and the combustion air
switch (4S25) closes. Power is applied through the high
limit cutout (4S26) to the Honeywell ignition control board
(4U18). The ignition control board (4U18) starts a pre-purge
timing cycle. At the end of the pre-purge cycle, the ignition
transformer (4T7) and the pilot solenoid valve (4L9) are en-
ergized. This starts a 10 second trial for pilot ignition. When
the pilot flame is established and sensed by the flame sens-
ing rod (4U19), stage 1 of the main gas valve (4L7) and the
60 seconds sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) is ener-
gized.
The ignition electrode (4E1) will spark continuously for 4.7
seconds in an attempt to establish a flame. The flame is
proven by the flame rod (4U19). The system will operate in
the low heat mode until there is an additional call for heat
established by closing the K1 contacts on the Heat Mod-
ule.
The 60 second sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) will
energize the combustion blower relay (4K33) which
switches the combustion blower motor to high speed and
energizes the 2nd stage solenoid on the gas valve (4L15).
56
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
The system will operate in the low heat mode until there is
an additional call for heat is established by closing the K3
contacts on the Heat Module.
eration. As you review the sequence of operations, keep the
following in mind:
1. The furnace will not light unless the manual gas valves
On Variable Air Volume systems, the sequencing time delay
relay (4DL6) will energize the combustion blower motor re-
lay (4K33) which switches the combustion blower motor to
high speed and energizes the 2nd stage solenoid on the
gas valve (4L7) after approximately 60 seconds.
are open and the control circuit switch 4S24 is closed.
2. The control systems are wired to ensure that heating and
cooling cannot occur simultaneously.
3. The unit supply fans must run continuously so air flow
If the flame rod (4U19) does not detect a pilot flame within
the 10 second trial for ignition period, the control will lock-
out. If a flame failure occurs during operation, the gas valve
(4L7), the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6), and the
combustion blower relay (4K33) is de-energized. The sys-
tem will purge and attempt to relight the pilot. If a flame is
not detected after this attempt, the Honeywell ignition con-
trol (4U18) will lock out. The combustion blower motor will
continue to operate as long as a heating demand exists and
the system switch (4S24) is "On".
switch 4S38 will stay closed.
4. Modulating Gas heat is available during both occupied
and unoccupied operation.
Whenever there is a call for heat, 1U50-K1 energizes and
combustion blower motor 4B11 begins to operate at High
speed on the 850 and 1000 MBH heaters. The blower will
operate on low speed for the 500 MBH. A relay 4K119 in
parallel with the main gas valve actuator control output, in-
sures the actuator will be open prior to proof of flame. This
will force the combustion air actuator 4U82 to the open po-
sition, causing the auxiliary switch on 4U82 to close. This
insures complete purging of the combustion chamber during
the 60 second purge cycle.
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the combus-
tion blower and the Honeywell ignition control board (4U18)
is de-energized.
Propane Gas
Ignition control IC board 4U18 will not energize, however,
unless the supply air flow switch 4S38, combustion air flow
switch 4S25, high limit cutout 4S26, the auxiliary switch on
combustion air actuator 4U82 and the proof of closure
switch on gas valve 4L22 are closed. These are all part of
the safety interlock system.
Units that operate on propane gas after 1990 have two (2)
additional controls that affect the combustion blower motor
operation and the sequence of the gas valve operation.
With the post purge time delay relay (4DL4), the additional
service switch (4S24), and the additional 115 volt control re-
lay (4K31) installed, the sequence of operation is as fol-
lows:
With all these conditions satisfied, the IC board energizes
and initiates an internal 60 second pre-purge time delay.
When the pre-purge period expires, 4U18 energizes both
the ignition transformer 4T7 and solenoid 4L9 on the inter-
mittent pilot valve. At that point, 4U18 gives electrode 4E1
approximately 10 seconds to establish a pilot flame. (The
presence of this flame is proven by flame rod 4U19.)
Power is applied to the Honeywell ignition control board
(4U18) through the high limit switch (4S26). The Honeywell
ignition control board (4U18) will sequence through its pre-
purge timing and pilot ignition sequence to The post purge
time delay relay (4DL4) delays the starting of the combus-
tion blower motor by approximately 60 seconds. Once the
timing has elasped, the combustion blower motor will start,
closing the combustion air switch (4S25).
If 4U18 does not detect a pilot flame at the end of this pe-
riod, it will shut down and lock out the ignition / combustion
circuit.
Energize the control relay (4K31) and the sequence time
delay relay (4DL6). 24 volts is applied from the new service
switch (4S24) through the normally open control relay
(4K31) contacts to energize the 1st stage solenoid on the
gas valve (4L7).
If the pilot is ignited within 10 seconds, the IC board de-en-
ergizes the ignition transformer 4T7 and electrode 4E1. At
this point, relay 4K119 will energize, starting the combus-
tion air actuator and the furnace. The feedback signal from
the discharge temperature sensor will cause the modulating
output from the heat module to change the damper position
as required to maintain the outlet temperature within the de-
sired band.
On an additional call for heat, the K3 contacts on the Heat
Module will close to energize the combustion blower relay
(4K33) which switches the combustion blower motor to high
speed and closes its normally open contacts allowing 24
volts to energize the 2nd stage on the gas valve (4L7).
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the
Flame Failure
Honeywell ignition control board (4U18) and the post purge
time delay relay (4DL4) is de-energized. The combustion
blower motor will continue to operate for approximately 15
seconds to purge the heat exchanger on the "Off" cycle.
In the event that IC board 4U18 loses the “proof-of-flame”
input signal during furnace operation, it will make one at-
tempt at reignite. If a flame is not reestablished within the
10 second trial period, 4U18 will shut down and lock out the
ignition /combustion control circuit. (Combustion blower mo-
tor 4B11 continues to run as long as a heating requirement
exists and control circuit switch 4S24 is ON.)
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation
Full and Limited Modulating Gas Furnace
Once locked out on flame failure, the IC board will not reac-
tivate the ignition/combustion control circuit until it is reset
manually. To do this, press the reset button on the front of
the IC board case.
The control system for the rooftop units are wired to ensure
that the heating and cooling do not occur simultaneously.
Refer to the modulating heat wiring diagram that shipped
with the unit while reviewing the following sequence of op-
57
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
A set of relay contacts are available for external use for
heat fail (Information Only).
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation
Electrical circuitry for units with steam or hot water heat is
limited to the connections associated with the modulating
valve actuator (4U15) and the freezestat (4S12).
Note: The modulating gas heaters are factory
adjusted for the proper air/gas ratio at minimum
and nameplate rated firing MBH for most areas in
the country.
Like the furnaces described earlier, SL/SH control systems
are wired to ensure that simultaneous heating and cooling
do not occur. The supply fan will cycle "On" and "Off" with
each call for heat during both an occupied and unoccupied
period.
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation
The control system for the rooftop units are wired to ensure
that the heating and cooling do not occur simultaneously.
Refer to the electric heat wiring diagrams that shipped with
the unit while reviewing the following sequence of opera-
tion. As you review the sequence of operations, remember
these points:
Whenever there is a call for heat, 1U50-K3 energizes. This
allows a modulated voltage signal to be sent to the “Wet”
heat actuator 4U15. Depending on the value of this signal,
4U15 regulates the flow of steam or hot water through the
coil by positioning the valve stem at some point between
fully closed (6 VDC) and fully open (8.5 VDC).
Whenever there is a call for heat, 1U50-K1 energizes. This
energizes HEAT 1 contactors 4K34 and 4K35 which, in
turn, energize two of the six 4HR3 heating elements.
Freeze Protection
A freezestat (4S12) is mounted inside the heat section of
SLH_ and SSH_ units to prevent the “wet” heat coil from
freezing during the "Off" cycle.
Note: Electric heater 4HR3 will only energize if both
of the heat section’s high limit safety controls—
4S27 and 4S33—are closed.
If the temperature of the air leaving the heating coils falls to
40 F, the freezestat's normally-open contacts close, com-
pleting the heat fail circuit on the UCM. When this occurs:
1. High limit Switch 4S27 will trip if exposed to a tempera-
ture of 133 + 5 F, and reset automatically once the tem-
perature falls to 110 + 5 F. It is mounted on the control-
box-side of the electric heat element assembly.
a. The supply fan is turned "Off".
b. "Wet” heat actuator 4U15 fully opens to allow hot
water or steam to pass through the heating coil and
prevent freeze-up.
2. Linear high limit 4S33 is encased in a capillary that ex-
tends across the unit’s supply air opening, and is an-
chored near the bottom of the heat section control box.
It is designed to trip if the temperature across any 6"
span of the capillary exceeds 185 + 10 F. Refer to
Table 5-1.
c. A "Heat Fail" diagnostic is displayed on the Human
Interface LCD screen.
For heating control settings and time delay specifications,
refer to Table 5-1.
The HEAT 2 (4K36, 4K37) and HEAT 3 (4K38, 4K39) con-
tactors are not energized unless the 1st stage bank of heat-
ing elements already operating are not satisfying the heat-
ing load.
58
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Use the checklist provided below in conjunction with the
“General Unit Requirement" checklist” to ensure that the
unit is properly installed and ready for operation. Be sure to
complete all of the procedures described in this section be-
fore starting the unit for the first time.
Units with Low Ambient option without HGBP - 0 F
Units with Low Ambient option with HGBP - +10 F
Note: To prevent compressor damage due to no
refrigerant flow, do not pump the system down with
the compressor(s) below 7 PSIG under any
circumstance.
[ ] Turn the field supplied disconnect switch, located up-
stream of the rooftop unit, to the "Off" position.
[ ] Check the supply fan belts for proper tension and the
fan bearings for sufficient lubrication. If the belts require
adjustment, or if the bearings need lubricating, refer to
the Service/Maintenance section of this manual for in-
structions.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
[ ] Inspect the interior of the unit for tools and debris. Install
all panels in preparation for starting the unit.
Electrical Phasing
[ ] Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 to the "Off"
position. It is located in the secondary of the 1T1 trans-
former.
Unlike traditional reciprocating compressors, scroll com-
pressors are phase sensitive. Proper phasing of the electri-
cal supply to the unit is critical for proper operation and reli-
ability.
[ ] Turn the 24 volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "Off"
position. It is located in the secondary of the 1T2 & 1T3
transformers.
The compressor motor is internally connected for clockwise
rotation with the incoming power supply phased as
A, B, C.
[ ] Turn the "System" selection switch (at the Remote
Panel) to the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection
switch (if Applicable) to the "Auto" or "Off" position.
Proper electrical supply phasing can be quickly determined
and corrected before starting the unit by using an instru-
ment such as an Associated Research Model 45 Phase Se-
quence Indicator and following the steps below:
[ ] Check all electrical connections for tightness and "point
of termination" accuracy.
[ ] Turn the field supplied disconnect switch that provides
power to terminal block 1TB1 or to the unit mounted dis-
connect switch 1S14 to the "Off" position.
[ ] Verify that the condenser airflow will be unobstructed.
[ ] Check the compressor crankcase oil level. Oil should be
visible in the compressor oil sight glass. The oil level
should be 1/2 to 3/4 high in the sight glass with the com-
pressor "Off".
[ ] Connect the phase sequence indicator leads to the ter-
minal block or unit mounted disconnect switch as fol-
lows;
[ ] Verify that the compressor discharge service valve and
the liquid line service valve is back seated on each cir-
cuit.
Phase Sequence
Leads
Unit Power
Terminal
Black (phase A)
Red (phase B)
Yellow (Phase C)
L1
L2
L3
CAUTION
Compressor Damage!
Do not allow liquid refrigerant to enter the suction line.
Excessive liquid accumulation in the liquid lines may
result in compressor damage.
[ ] Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
Compressor service valves must be fully opened before
start-up (suction, discharge, liquid line, and oil line).
WARNING
Do not start the unit in the cooling mode if the ambient tem-
perature is below the following minimum recommended op-
erating temperatures:
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
Standard unit with or without HGBP -
+55 F for 20 & 40 Ton
+50 F for 25 & 30 Ton
+45 F for 70 thru 130 Ton
+40 F for 55 Ton
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
+35 F for 50 Ton
+30 F for 60 Ton
59
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Voltage Imbalance
[ ] Observe the ABC and CBA phase indicator lights on the
face of the sequencer. The ABC indicator light will glow
if the phase is ABC. If the CBA indicator light glows,
open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch
and reverse any two power wires.
Excessive three phase voltage imbalance between phases
will cause motors to overheat and eventually fail. The maxi-
mum allowable voltage imbalance is 2%. Measure and
record the voltage between phases 1, 2, and 3 and calcu-
late the amount of imbalance as follows:
[ ] Restore the main electrical power and recheck the
phasing. If the phasing is correct, open the disconnect
switch or circuit protection switch and remove the phase
sequence indicator.
% Voltage Imbalance =
100 X AV - VD where;
AV
AV (Average Voltage) = Volt 1 + Volt 2 + Volt 3
3
V1, V2, V3 = Line Voltage Readings
VD = Line Voltage reading that deviates the farthest from
the average voltage.
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance
Voltage Supply
Electrical power to the unit must meet stringent require-
ments for the unit to operate properly. Measure each leg
(phase-to-phase) of the power supply. Each reading must
fall within the utilization range stamped on the unit name-
plate. If any of the readings do not fall within the proper tol-
erances, notify the power company to correct this situation
before operating the unit.
Example: If the voltage readings of the supply power
measured 221, 230, and 227, the average volts would
be:
221 + 230 + 227 = 226 Avg.
3
VD (reading farthest from average) = 221
The percentage of Imbalance equals:
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
100 X 226 - 221 = 2.2%
226
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in
handling live electrical components perform these
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions
when exposed to live electrical components could result
in death or serious injury.
The 2.2% imbalance in this example exceeds the maximum
allowable imbalance of 2.0%. This much imbalance be-
tween phases can equal as much as a 20% current imbal-
ance with a resulting increase in motor winding tempera-
tures that will decrease motor life. If the voltage imbalance
is over 2%, notify the proper agencies to correct the voltage
problem before operating this equipment.
60
Table 4-1
Service Test Guide for Component Operation
COMPONENT
BEING TESTED
COMPONENT CONFIGURATION
Supply Exhaust Condenser Heat Stages
Occ
VFD Unocc
Compressor Stage
Econo Exhaust
Fan
Fan
Fans
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Damper Damper IGV Output Relay
* COMPRESSOR
20 thru 30 Ton
A
Off
Off
Off
Off
A-Off/B-On Off Off Off K10-Off K11-On N/A
A-On/B-Off Off Off Off K10-On K11-Off N/A
N/A Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
N/A Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
B
40 thru 60 Ton
1A
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-On
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
1B
2A
2B
2A-On/2B-Off
0%
70 thru 105 Ton
1A & 1B
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-On
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-On/2B-Off
1C
2A & 2B
2C
115 thru 130 Ton
1A & 1B
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-On
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-On/2B-Off
1C & 1D
2A & 2B
2C & 2D
** CONDENSER FANS
20 Ton
A-2B1
B-2B2
Off
Off
Off
Off
A-On/B-Off Off Off Off
A-Off/B-On Off Off Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
25 - 30 Ton
A-2B1
B-2B2/2B3
40 Ton
Off
Off
Off
Off
A-On/B-Off Off Off Off
A-Off/B-On Off Off Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
1A-2B1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-On/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
1B-2B2
2A-2B4
2B-2B5
50 & 55 Ton
1A-2B1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-On/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
1B-2B2/2B3
2A-2B4
2B-2B5/2B6
60 thru 75 Ton
1A-2B1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-On/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
1B-2B2/2B3
2A-2B4
2B-2B5/2B6
Refer to the next page for applicable notes.
61
Table 4-1 (Continued)
Service Test Guide for Component Operation
COMPONENT
COMPONENT CONFIGURATION
Compressor Stage
Occ
VFD Unocc
BEING TESTED
Supply Exhaust Condenser Heat Stages
Econo Exhaust
Fan
Fan
Fans
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Damper Damper IGV Output Relay
(Cont.)
** CONDENSER FANS
90 Ton
1A-2B3/2B14
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-On/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-On
1B-2B1/2B2
2A-2B6/2B13
2B-2B4/2B5
105 & 115 Ton
1A-2B3/2B14
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-On/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2A-Off/2B-On
1B-2B1/2B2/2B19
2A-2B6/2B13
2B-2B4/2B5/2B15
130 Ton
1A-2B3/2B14
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
1B-2B1/2B2
2B19/2B20
2A-2B6/2B13
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-On/2B-Off
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off
2A-Off/2B-On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
2B-2B4/2B5
2B15/2B21
SUPPLY FAN
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
Off Off Off
Off Off Off
On On N/A
On Off N/A
Off On N/A
90% Select
5% Select
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed 100% 100% 100% Default
EXHAUST FAN
GAS HEAT (Full Cap.)
Stage 1
Open
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Stage 2
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Full Modulating
(High Fire Adjustment)
Full Modulating
(Low Fire Adjustment)
Limited Modulating
(High Fire Adjustment)
Limited Modulating
(Low Fire Adjustment)
ELECTRIC HEAT
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
90% Select
33% Select
On On On
On Off Off
Off On Off
Off Off On
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc
Open
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Hydronic Heat
Pre - Heater
Fresh Air Dampers
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
All Off
All Off
All Off
100% Select
On N/A N/A
Off Off Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default
100% Closed Closed 0% Default
Open
Exhaust Dampers
Off
Off
All Off
Off Off Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100%
100% Closed 0% Default
Open
* - Compressors for the 20 thru 60 Ton units can operate individually or together and in any order while in the SERVICE TEST mode.
Compressors 1A &1B and compressors 2A & 2B operate simultaneously within their respective circuits on the 70 thru 105 Ton units.
Compressors 1A & 1B, 1C & 1D, 2A & 2B, 2C & 2D operate simultaneously within their respective circuits on 115 and 130 Ton units.
Caution:
Do Not operate the compressors for extended periods of time without the condenser fans, High Head Pressure will develope.
** - Condenser fan outputs can operate individually or together and in any order while in the SERVICE TEST mode.
*** - Once the unit has started, refer to the Status Menu in the Human Interface for the OA CFM.
**** - RTM OCC/UNOCC output in the Service Test Mode must be in the unoccupied mode to open the system VAV boxes and the
Inlet Guide Vanes or to drive the VFD to 100%.
62
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation
WARNING
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote
panel is in the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection
switch for constant volume units is in the "Auto" position.
(VAV units do not utilize a "Fan" selection input.)
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
c. Interchange any two of the field connected main
power wires at the unit terminal block 1TB1 or the
factory mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-
ming instructions.
Note: Interchanging "Load" side power wires at the
fan contactors will only affect the individual fan
rotation. Ensure that the voltage phase sequence at
the main terminal block 1TB1 or the factory
mounted disconnect switch 1S14 is ABC as
outlined in the "Electrical Phasing" section.
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the unit Fans for operation by
scrolling through the displays. All of the Fans (Supply,
Exhaust, and Condenser fans) can be programed to be
"On", if desired. Verify proper fan rotation for VFDs with
bypass.
If some of the fans are rotating backwards;
a. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module
in the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.
b. Open the field supplied disconnect switch upstream
of the rooftop unit. Lock the disconnect switch in the
open position while working at the unit.
Refer to Figure 4-1 for the condenser fan locations and
the Human Interface designator.
6. Once the configuration for the Fans is complete, press
the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test in
__Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
c. Interchange any two of the fan motor leads at the
contactor for each fan that is rotating backwards.
System Airflow Measurements
Constant Volume Systems
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote
panel is in the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection
switch for constant volume units is in the "Auto" position.
(VAV units do not utilize a "Fan" selection input.)
WARNING
Rotating Components!
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product it may be necessary to measure the
speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li-
censed service individual who has been properly
trained in handling exposed rotating components, per-
form these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precau-
tions when exposed to rotating components could re-
sult in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before
the fans will begin to operate.
8. Check the supply fan and the exhaust fans (if equipped)
for proper rotation. The direction of rotation is indicated
by an arrow on the fan housings. Check the condenser
fans for clockwise rotation when viewed from the top.
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;
a. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module
in the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-
ming instructions.
b. Open the field supplied disconnect switch upstream
of the rooftop unit. Lock the disconnect switch in the
open position while working at the unit.
63
Figure 4-1
Condenser Fan Location with Human Interface Designator
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the Supply Fan for operation
by scrolling through the displays.
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before
the fans will begin to operate.
6. Once the configuration for the Fan is complete, press the
NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test in
__Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
8. With the system in the SERVICE MODE and the supply
fan rotating in the proper direction, measure the amper-
age at the supply fan contactor 1K16 & 1K15 (additional
contactor for 90 thru 130 Ton units). If the amperage ex-
ceeds the motor nameplate value, the static pressure is
less than design and the airflow is too high. If the amper-
age is below the motor nameplate value, static pressure
may be too high and CFM may be too low. To determine
the actual CFM ( 5%);
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
a. Measure the actual fan RPM
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in
handling live electrical components perform these
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions
when exposed to live electrical components could result
in death or serious injury.
b. Calculate the Theoretical BHP
Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP)
Motor Nameplate Amps
c. Plot this data onto the appropriate Fan Performance
Curve in Figure 4-2. Where the two points intersect,
read straight down to the CFM line.
64
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
lay before the test is to start. This service test will begin
after the TEST START key is pressed and the delay
designated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER
key to confirm this choice.
Use this data to assist in calculating a new fan drive if the
CFM is not at design specifications.
An alternate method with less accuracy is to measure the
static pressure drop across the evaporator coil. This can be
accomplished by;
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
a. drilling a small hole through the unit casing on each
side of the coil.
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in
handling live electrical components perform these
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions
when exposed to live electrical components could result
in death or serious injury.
Note: Coil damage can occur if care is not taken
when drilling holes in this area.
b. Measure the difference between the pressures at
both locations.
c. Plot this value onto the appropriate pressure drop
curve in Figure 4-3. Use the data in Table 4-2
(Component Static Pressure Drops) to assist in
calculating a new fan drive if the CFM is not at
design specifications.
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before
the fan will begin to operate.
8. With the IGV's/VFD at 100% and the supply fan operat-
ing at full airflow capability, measure the amperage at the
supply fan contactor 1K16 & 1K15 (additional contactor
for 90 through 130 Ton units). If the amperage exceeds
the motor nameplate value, the static pressure is less
than design and the airflow is too high. If the amperage
is below the motor nameplate value, static pressure may
be too high and CFM may be too low. To determine the
actual CFM ( 5%);
d. Plug the holes after the proper CFM has been
established.
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.
Variable Air Volume Systems
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote
panel is in the "Off" position.
a. Measure the actual fan RPM
b. Calculate the Theoretical BHP
Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP
Motor Nameplate Amps
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
c. Plot this data onto the appropriate Fan Performance
Curve in Figure 4-4. Where the two points intersect,
read straight down to the CFM line.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Use this data to assist in calculating a new fan drive if the
CFM is not at design specifications.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
An alternate method with less accuracy is to measure the
static pressure drop across the evaporator coil. This can be
accomplished by;
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
a. drilling a small hole through the unit casing on each
side of the coil.
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
Note: Coil damage can occur if care is not taken
when drilling holes in this area.
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-
ming instructions.
b. Measure the difference between the pressures at
both locations.
c. Plot this value onto the appropriate pressure drop
curve in Figure 4-3. Use the data in Table 4-2
(Component Static Pressure Drops) to assist in
calculating a new fan drive if the CFM is not at
design specifications.
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for operation by scrolling through the displays;
Supply Fan
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
d. Plug the holes after the proper CFM has been
established.
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.
6. Once the configuration for the components is complete,
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the de-
65
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
7. With the exhaust dampers open and the exhaust fan op-
erating at full airflow capability, measure the amperage at
the exhaust fan contactor 1K17. If the amperage ex-
ceeds the motor nameplate value, the static pressure is
less than design and airflow is too high. If the amperage
is below the motor nameplate value, static pressure may
be too high and CFM may be too low. To determine the
actual CFM ( 5%);
Exhaust Airflow Measurement
(Optional with all Units)
1. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
WARNING
a. Measure the actual fan RPM
Hazardous Voltage!
b. Calculate the Theoretical BHP
Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP
Motor Nameplate Amps
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
Use Tables 4-3 & 4-4 to calculate a new fan drive if the
CFM is not at design specifications.
8. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement
(Optional with all units equipped with an economizer)
2. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
3. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-
ming instructions.
1. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-
ming instructions.
4. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for operation by scrolling through the displays;
Exhaust Fan
2. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for Economizer operation by scrolling through the
displays;
Exhaust Dampers (100% Open, if applicable)
Fresh Air dampers (100% Open)
Variable Frequency Drive (100%, if applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Default)
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Fresh Air dampers (Selected % Open)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
Outside Air CFM Setpoint
5. Once the configuration for the components is complete,
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
Outside Air Pre-Heater Operation (if applicable)
3. Once the configuration for the components is complete,
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
4. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 3 must elapse before
the fans will begin to operate.
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in
handling live electrical components perform these
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions
when exposed to live electrical components could result
in death or serious injury.
5. With the unit operating in the "TEST MODE", the amount
of outside air flowing through the traq sensor can be view
by switching to the "STATUS MENU" screen "OA CFM.
6. Scroll to the "ECONOMIZER ENABLE/ECONOMIZER
POSITION" screen by pressing the "NEXT" key and read
the corresponding damper opening percentage (%).
6. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 5 must elapse before
the fans will begin to operate.
7. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the unit operation.
66
Figure 4-2
20 & 25 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
S_HFC20 & 25 Ton
Dual 15 X 15 Fans
Entrance Losses
- without Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust Fan
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 3
- Maximum Motor HP
C20 & C25 = 15 HP
- Maximum RPM
3 HP - 5 HP = 1100
7.5 HP - 15 HP = 1655
- Maximum CFM
1700 RPM
1600 RPM
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
20 HP
50%
1500 RPM
1400 RPM
60%
70%
15 HP
1300 RPM
1200 RPM
10 HP
7.5 HP
C20 = 9,000
C25 = 11,000
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
1100 RPM
1000 RPM
80%
90%
5 HP
900 RPM
800 RPM
3 HP
700 RPM
600 RPM
500 RPM
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
CFM
12000
14000
16000
18000
20000
30 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
7.5
S_HFC30
Dual 18 X 18 Fans
Entrance Losses
- without Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust
1400 RP M
7.0
6.5
1300 RP M
6.0
25 HP
Fan Curve Limits
5.5
50%
60%
12 0 0 R P M
- Minimum Motor HP = 5
- Maximum Motor HP = 20
- Maximum RPM = 1379
- Maximum CFM = 13,500
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
5.0
4.5
20 HP
1100 RP M
15 HP
4.0
1000 RP M
3.5
10 HP
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
900 RP M
800 RP M
7.5 HP
70%
5 HP
700 RP M
600 RP M
3 HP
80%
90% wocfm
500 RP M
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
CFM
12000
14000
16000
18000
20000
67
Figure 4-2 (Continued)
40, 50 & 55 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
7.5
S_HFC40, C50, C55
Dual 20 X 20 Fans
Entrance Losses
- without Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
1200 RPM
7.0
6.5
40 HP
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 7.5
- Maximum Motor HP
C40, C50 & C55 = 30 HP
- Maximum RPM
7.5 - 15 HP = 1141
20 - 30 HP = 1170
- Maximum CFM
6.0
1100 RPM
50%
5.5
30 HP
25 HP
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
1000 RPM
900 RPM
60%
70%
20 HP
15 HP
10 HP
800 RPM
700 RPM
C40 = 18,000
C50 = 22,500
C55 = 24,000
7.5 HP
80%
90%
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
5 HP
600 RPM
500 RPM
0
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000 22000 24000 26000 28000 30000
CFM
60, 70 & 75 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes
1200 RPM
8.0
S_HFC60, C70, C75
Dual 22 X 22 Fans
Entrance Losses
- without Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 10
- Maximum Motor HP = 40
- Maximum RPM = 1130
- Maximum CFM
7.5
1100 RPM
7.0
50 HP
6.5
1000 RPM
6.0
50%
60%
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
40 HP
900 RPM
800 RPM
700 RPM
30 HP
20 HP
C60 = 27,000
25 HP
C70 & C75 = 30,000
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
15 HP
70%
80%
10 HP
600 RPM
500 RPM
7.5 HP
90% wocfm
0
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
18000
CFM
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
36000
68
Figure 4-2 (Continued)
90, 105, 115, & 130 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes
9
1
6
0
0
R
P
M
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
5
0
0
R
P
M
1
4
0
0
R
P
M
1
3
0
0
R
P
M
1
2
0
0
RP
M
1
1
0
0
R
P
M
1
0
0
0
R
P
M
9
0
0
R
P
M
M
F
C
O
W
%
0
9
0
10000
20000
30000
CFM
40000
50000
60000
69
Figure 4-3
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 60 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-60 Ton
Standard Evaporator Coil
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000 9000 10000
20000
30000
Unit Airflow, CFM
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 60 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-60 Ton
Standard Evaporator Coil
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0
0.1
4
F
H
0.09
0.08
*
S
5
2
-
0.07
0.06
0
2
F
H
*
S
0.05
0.04
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000 9000 10000
20000
30000
Unit Airflow, CFM
70
Figure 4-3 (Continued)
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70 through 130 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70-130 Ton Ton
Standard Evaporator Coil
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
5
7
F
H
*
S
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
Unit Airflow, CFM
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70 through 130 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70-130 Ton Ton
Standard Evaporator Coil
2
1
0.9
0
3
1
0.8
0.7
&
5
1
1
F
H
*
S
0.6
0.5
5
0
1
F
H
*
S
0.4
0.3
0
9
F
H
*
S
0.2
20000
30000
40000
50000
Unit Airflow, CFM
71
Figure 4-3 (Continued)
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)
2
5
0
1
&
1
0
9
F
0.9
H
*
S
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0
6
F
H
*
S
0.4
0.3
5
2
&
0
2
0.2
F
H
*
S
0.1
4000
6000
8000
10000
20000
40000
60000
Unit Airflow, CFM
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
4000
6000
8000
10000
20000
40000
Unit Airflow, CFM
72
Figure 4-4
20 & 25 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
1700 RP M
S_HFC20 & 25 Ton
Entrance Losses
- with Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filterts
- without Return Air dampers
- without Exhaust Fan
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 3
- Maximum Motor HP
C20 & C25 = 15 HP
- Maximum RPM
3 HP - 5 HP = 1100
7.5 HP - 15 HP = 1655
- Maximum CFM
C20 = 9,000
C25 = 11,000
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
7.5
7.0
1600 RP M
6.5
20 HP
15 00 R P M
50%
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
60%
15 HP
1400 RP M
13 00 R P M
70%
10 HP
1200 RP M
1100 RP M
10 00 R P M
80%
7.5 HP
5 HP
900 RP M
800 RP M
3 HP
90%wocfm
700 RP M
600 RP M
500 RP M
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
CFM
12000
14000
16000
18000
20000
30 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
7.5
S_HFC30
Dual 18 X 18 Fans
Entrance Losses
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
1400 RPM
1300 RPM
- with Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 5
- Maximum Motor HP = 20
- Maximum RPM = 1379
- Maximum CFM = 13,500
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
25 HP
50%
20 HP
15 HP
1200 RPM
1100 RPM
60%
70%
10 HP
1000 RPM
7.5 HP
3 HP
900 RPM
800 RPM
5 HP
80%
700 RPM
600 RPM
500 RPM
90% wocfm
0
4000
8000
12000
16000
20000
CFM
73
Figure 4-4 (Continued)
40, 50 & 55 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
7.5
7.0
S_HFC40, C50, C55
Dual 20 X 20 Fans
Entrance Losses
- with Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 7.5
- Maximum Motor HP
C40, C50 & C55 = 30 HP
- Maximum RPM
7.5 - 15 HP = 1141
20 - 30 HP = 1170
- Maximum CFM
1200 RPM
6.5
40 HP
6.0
30 HP
50%
60%
1100 RPM
5.5
25 HP
70%
5.0
1000 RPM
20 HP
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
15 HP
900 RPM
80%
10 HP
C40 = 18,000
C50 = 22,500
C55 = 24,000
800 RPM
700 RPM
7.5 HP
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
5 HP
90%
600 RPM
500 RPM
0
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000 22000 24000 26000 28000 30000
CFM
60, 70 & 75 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
1200 RPM
S_HFC60, C70, C75
Dual 22 X 22 Fans
Entrance Losses
- with Inlet Guide Vanes
- without Evap Coil
- without Filters
- without Return Air Dampers
- without Exhaust
Fan Curve Limits
- Minimum Motor HP = 10
- Maximum Motor HP = 40
- Maximum RPM = 1130
- Maximum CFM
1100 RPM
50 HP
1000 RPM
900 RPM
50%
40 HP
25 HP
30 HP
60%
70%
20 HP
C60 = 27,000
800 RPM
700 RPM
C70 & C75 = 30,000
- Maximum Static Pressure
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.
15 HP
10 HP
600 RPM
500 RPM
80%
7.5 HP
90% wocfm
0
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
18000
CFM
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
36000
74
Figure 4-4 (Continued)
90, 105, 115, & 130 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes
9
M
F
C
O
W
8
%
0
4
7
6
1
0
0
H
P
1
3
0
0
R
P
M
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
H
P
1
2
0
0
6
R
P
M
0
H
P
5
0
1
1
0
0
R
H
P
P
M
4
0
H
P
1
0
0
0
R
P
M
3
0
H
P
9
0
2
0
R
P
M
M
F
5
C
O
H
P
W
2
%
0
0
9
H
P
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
CFM
75
Table 4-2
20 through 75 Ton Component Static Pressure Drops (Inches W.C.)
Evaporator Coil
Heating System
Filters
Throwaway Perm Bag Cartridge Std With Or
SSHF/G Std. High Wire And And Roof Without
Econ.
CFM
Nom STD
High
Std.
Capacity
SFHF/G SEHF/G SLHF/G
Tons AIR Wet Dry Wet Dry Low High All KW's Low High Low High Fiber Effic. Mesh Prefilter Prefilter Curb Exh. Fan
4,000 .07 .05 .14 .10
6,000 .13 .10 .27 .20
8,000 .21 .16 .43 .32
9,000 .26 .20 .52 .39
10,000 .31 .23 .61 .46
12,000 .41 .31 .82 .63
5,000 .10 .07 .20 .15
.02 N/A
.05 .05
.09 .09
.12 .12
.14 .15
.20 .22
.03 N/A
.02
.04
.07
.09
.11
.17
.03
——
.06
.11
.13
.18
.21
.04
.09
.16
.22
.25
.35
.07
——
.16
.29
.32
.44
.53
.11
.22
.32
.44
.62
.84
.16
.29
.44
.62
.85
.98
.16
.29
.44
.53
.62
.73
.85
1.04
1.18
.16
.29
.44
.53
.62
.73
.85
1.04
1.18
.05 .06 .02 .06 .03 .03
.09 .12 .05 .12 .06 .06
.15 .19 .10 .20 .09 .09
.19 .24 .12 .22 .11 .11
.23 .28 .15 .29 .13 .13
.33 .40 .22 .42 .15 .15
.07 .09 .04 .09 .05 .05
.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.02
.3
.5
.71
.83
.95
1.19
.40
.50
.66
.24
.44
.68
.81
.95
1.26
.34
.44
.62
.01
.02
.05
.07
.10
.14
.01
.03
.06
.12
.15
.19
.27
.03
20
6,000 .13 .10 .27 .20 —— .05
—— —— —— —— —— —— ——
—— ——
7,500 .19 .15 .39 .29
10,000 .31 .23 .61 .46
11,000 .36 .27 .71 .54
12,500 .44 .34 .87 .67
14,000 .52 .40 1.05 .81
6,000 .15 .11 .20 .15
9,000 .29 .22 .39 .29
12,000 .46 .35 .61 .46
14,000 .59 .45 .78 .60
15,000 .65 .50 .87 .67
17,000 .80 .62 1.06 .82
8,000 .10 .07 .20 .15
10,000 .14 .11 .29 .21 —— .11
12,000 .19 .14 .39 .29
16,000 .31 .23 .61 .46
17,000 .34 .26 .67 .51 N/A .29
20,000 .44 .34 .87 .67 N/A .41
22,000 .51 .39 1.02 .79 N/A .50
10,000 .17 .13 .23 .17
14,000 .29 .22 .39 .29
17,000 .39 .30 .53 .40
20,000 .51 .39 .68 .52
24,000 .69 .53 .91 .70
28,000 .88 .68 1.17 .91
12,000 .13 .10 .25 .18
16,000 .20 .16 .39 .29
20,000 .29 .23 .55 .42
24,000 .39 .31 .74 .57
28,000 .50 .39 .95 .73
30,000 .56 .44 1.06 .82
12,000 .20 .16 N/A N/A .10 .08
16,000 .32 .26 N/A N/A .18 .14
20,000 .46 .37 N/A N/A .27 .21
22,000 .54 .43 N/A N/A .33 .25
24,000 .62 .50 N/A N/A .40 .30
26,000 .70 .56 N/A N/A .47 .32
28,000 .79 .64 N/A N/A .54 .33
31,000 .93 .75 N/A N/A .60 .40
33,000 1.03 .83 N/A N/A .65 .46
.08 .08
.14 .15
.17 .18
.22 .23
.28 .29
.05 .05
.11 .12
.20 .21
.26 .29
.30 .33
.39 .42
.09 N/A
.14 .17 .09 .18 .09 .09
.23 .28 .15 .29 .13 .13
.29 .33 .19 .35 .15 .15
.33 .42 .24 .42 .19 .19
.41 .53 .30 .53 .24 .24
.09 .12 .05 .12 .04 .04
.19 .24 .12 .22 .07 .17
.31 .39 .22 .41 .11 .11
.40 .51 .30 .50 .14 .14
.45 .57 .33 .52 .16 .16
.58 .73 .42 .67 .21 .21
.09 .11 .05 .11 .04 .04
.03
.05
.06
.08
.10
.01
.02
.04
.06
.07
.09
.02
.04
.10
.12
.19
.24
.02
.07
.16
.25
.30
.39
.01
.10
.19
.23
.30
.39
.06
.15
.27
.39
.43
.59
.03
.95
.95
25
30
1.06
1.29
——
.34
.54
.75
1.11
1.34
——
.26
.48
.75
.95
.95
1.03
1.20
.37
.49
.61
.88
.95
1.17
——
.37
.56
.72
.88
1.11
——
.44
.63
.84
1.06
1.30
.31
.43
.56
.87
.95
1.22
——
.30
.50
.68
.88
1.17
——
.37
.58
.82
—— —— —— —— —— —— ——
—— ——
.20 .15
.34 .26
.17 .22 .11 .21 .08 .08
.28 .36 .20 .36 .12 .12
.31 .39 .22 .41 .13 .13
.42 .52 .30 .51 .17 .17
.51 .63 .36 .62 .21 .21
.13 .16 .07 .15 .04 .04
.22 .28 .15 .28 .07 .07
.31 .40 .22 .41 .10 .10
.42 .52 .30 .51 .12 .12
.48 .72 .45 .75 .16 .16
.62 .98 .61 .99 .20 .20
.10 .13 .06 .11 .05 .05
.17 .21 .11 .19 .07 .07
.24 .31 .16 .27 .10 .10
.33 .42 .22 .39 .11 .11
.44 .55 .32 .50 .17 .17
.51 .63 .37 .57 .20 .20
.10 .13 .06 .11 .05 .05
.17 .21 .11 .19 .07 .07
.24 .31 .16 .27 .10 .10
.29 .37 .19 .33 .12 .12
.33 .42 .22 .39 .14 .14
.39 .49 .27 .45 .16 .16
.44 .55 .32 .50 .17 .17
.49 .61 .39 .55 .21 .21
.52 .67 .44 .60 .24 .24
.10 .13 .06 .11 .05 .05
.17 .21 .11 .19 .07 .07
.24 .31 .16 .27 .10 .10
.29 .37 .19 .33 .12 .12
.33 .42 .22 .39 .14 .14
.39 .49 .27 .45 .16 .16
.44 .55 .32 .50 .17 .17
.49 .61 .39 .55 .21 .21
.52 .67 .44 .60 .24 .24
.03
.05
.06
.08
.10
.01
.03
.04
.05
.07
.10
.01
.02
.03
.04
.06
.07
.01
.02
.03
.04
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.01
.02
.03
.04
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.04
.10
.12
.19
.23
.03
.07
.12
.19
.30
.39
.02
.05
.10
.16
.30
.34
.02
.05
.10
.13
.16
.23
.30
.37
.42
.02
.05
.10
.13
.16
.23
.30
.37
.42
.07
.09
.11
.17
.20
.05
.08
.11
.17
.23
.30
.07
.10
.16
.23
.30
.34
.07
.10
.16
.20
.23
.26
.30
.36
.40
.07
.10
.16
.20
.23
.26
.30
.36
.40
40
50/55
60
.12 .10
.26 .20
.39 .29
.58 .41
.73 .58
.99 .79
.10 .08
.18 .14
.27 .21
.40 .30
.48 .33
.62 .38
1.06
——
——
.44
.63
.84
1.08
——
——
.37
.58
.82
.95
.95
1.06
1.17
1.22
——
——
.44
.63
.84
.95
1.06
1.17
1.22
——
——
1.08
1.23
1.29
——
——
.37
.58
.82
.95
1.08
1.23
1.29
——
——
70
12,000 .25 .18 .31 .23
16,000 .39 .29 .49 .37
20,000 .55 .42 .69 .53
22,000 .65 .49 .81 .62
24,000 .74 .57 .93 .71
26,000 .84 .65 1.05 .81
28,000 .95 .73 1.19 .92
.10 .08
.18 .14
.27 .21
.33 .25
.40 .30
.47 .32
.54 .33
75
31,000 1.12 .87 1.40 1.08 .60 .40
33,000 1.24 .96 1.55 1.20 .65 .46
76
Table 4-2 (Continued)
90 through 130 Ton Component Static Pressure Drops (Inches W.C.)
Evaporator Coil
Heating System
Filters
Throwaway Perm Bag Cartridge Std With Or
SSHF/G Std. High Wire And And Roof Without
Econ.
CFM
Nom STD
High
Std.
Capacity
SFHF/G SEHF/G SLHF/G
Tons AIR Wet Dry Wet Dry Low High All KW's Low High Low High Fiber Effic. Mesh Prefilter Prefilter Curb Exh. Fan
27,000 .40 .31 .67 .51 N/A .25
32,000 .53 .41 .89 .68 N/A .31
37,000 .67 .52 1.12 .86 N/A .39
42,000 .82 .63 1.36 1.06 N/A .46
45,000 .92 .71 1.53 1.19 N/A .52
31,000 .56 .45 .84 .64 N/A .28
35,000 .68 .54 1.02 .78 N/A .36
39,000 .81 .65 1.21 .94 N/A .42
43,000 .94 .76 1.42 1.10 N/A .45
46,000 1.05 .84 1.58 1.23 N/A .55
31,000 .84 .64 N/A N/A N/A .28
35,000 1.03 .79 N/A N/A N/A .36
39,000 1.21 .94 N/A N/A N/A .42
43,000 1.42 1.10 N/A N/A N/A .45
46,000 1.58 1.23 N/A N/A N/A .55
.13
.16
.23
.29
.32
.17
.21
.26
.30
.34
.17
.21
.26
.30
.34
.26 .31 .22 .32 .11 .13
.35 .41 .30 .43 .14 .16
.45 .52 .40 .55 .17 .19
.56 .65 .50 .68 .21 .22
.63 .73 .58 .76 .24 .24
.33 .39 .29 .40 N/A .13
.41 .48 .36 .50 N/A .16
.49 .57 .44 .60 N/A .19
.57 .66 .53 .71 N/A .22
.65 .75 .61 .79 N/A .24
.33 .39 .29 .40 N/A .13
.41 .48 .36 .50 N/A .16
.49 .57 .44 .60 N/A .19
.57 .66 .53 .71 N/A .22
.65 .75 .61 .79 N/A .24
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.68
.84
1.02
1.19
——
.82
.65
.84
1.04
1.06
——
.80
——
——
——
.20
.31
.41
.52
.63
.22
.32
.44
.54
.64
.22
.32
.44
.54
.64
90
.96
.96
1.09
1.22
——
.82
1.12
1.30
——
.80
105
.96
.96
115/
130
1.09
1.22
0
1.12
1.30
0
Notes:
1. Static pressure drops of accessory components must be added to external static pressure to enter fan selection tables.
2. Gas heat section maximum temperature rise of 60 F.
3. Throwaway filter option limited to 300 ft/min face velocity.
4. Bag filter option limited to 740 ft/min face velocity.
5. Horizontal roof curbs assume 0.50" static pressure drop or double the standard roof curb pressure drop, whichever is greater.
6. No additional pressure loss for model SXHF.
7. 90 - 130 ton roof curbs adds no pressure drop.
Table 4-3
90 through 130 Ton 100% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance
STD
AIR
CFM
Negative Static Pressure
0.75" W.G. 1.00" W.G.
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
0.25" W.G.
0.50" W.G.
1.25" W.G.
1.50" W.G
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
40,000
477
530
7.04
9.80
513
7.95
561
9.29
604 10.66 648 12.15 693 13.83
558 10.69 597 11.99 639 13.54 677 15.08 716 16.73
584 13.24 608 14.16 637 15.34 675 16.96 712 18.67 746 20.38
638 17.42 659 18.39 683 19.53 713 21.02 749 22.88 781 24.75
693 22.42 711 23.46 732 24.61 756 25.99 786 27.75 818 29.80
766 30.50 782 31.62 800 32.83 819 34.17 841 35.75 868 37.69
STD
AIR
Negative Static Pressure
1.75" W.G.
2.00" W.G.
2.25" W.G.
2.50" W.G.
CFM
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
737 15.66 781 17.54 823 19.45 862 21.42
756 18.53 796 20.51 835 22.59 874 24.71
781 22.18 817 24.10 853 26.19 889 28.42
812 26.63 844 28.57 877 30.61 910 32.79
848 31.85 877 33.89 905 35.98 935 38.14
897 39.94 926 42.24 952 44.50 977 46.77
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
40,000
Note:
Blocked areas identify non-standard drive selections.
77
Table 4-3 (Continued)
20 through 75 Ton 100% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance
Negative Static Pressure
Cfm 0.25" W.G. 0.50" W.G. 0.75" W.G. 1.00" W.G. 1.25" W.G. 1.50" W.G. 1.75" W.G. 2.00" W.G.
Std.
Air RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
S*HF-C20
S*HF-C25
4,000
6,000
8,000
10,000
4,000
6,000
399 0.38 538 0.75 640 1.08 730 1.45 811 1.87 882 2.34 947 2.88
453 0.74 570 1.17 675 1.65 765 2.22 845 2.78
547 1.59 619 1.81 711 2.48 797 3.01
640 2.79
399 0.38 538 0.75 640 1.08 730 1.45 811 1.87 882 2.34 947 2.88 1017 3.55
453 0.74 570 1.17 675 1.65 765 2.22 845 2.78 912 3.27 975 3.77 1036 4.30
547 1.59 619 1.81 711 2.48 797 3.01 876 3.66 947 4.40
8,000
10,000
12,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
10,000
12,000
14,000
7,500
640 2.79 712 3.25 767 3.48 837 4.26 911 5.04
737 4.44
S*HF-C30
399 0.38 538 0.75 640 1.08 730 1.45 811 1.87 882 2.34 947 2.88 1017 3.55
453 0.74 570 1.17 675 1.65 765 2.22 845 2.78 912 3.27 975 3.77 1036 4.30
547 1.59 619 1.81 711 2.48 797 3.01 876 3.66 947 4.40 1013 5.18 1075 5.94
640 2.79 712 3.25 767 3.48 837 4.26 911 5.04 980 5.70 1045 6.46 1106 7.31
737 4.44 806 5.22 860 5.64 905 5.89 956 6.49
837 6.67
S*HF-C40
S*HF-C50
S*HF-C55
S*HF-C60
334 0.75 438 1.21 535 1.77 616 2.35 686 2.98 750 3.64 809 4.34 864 5.06
362 1.09 449 1.57 536 2.16 618 2.84 689 3.52 753 4.24 812 4.99 867 5.77
435 2.19 496 2.70 563 3.35 628 4.04 693 4.83 757 5.71 817 6.63 873 8.53
486 3.22 542 3.86 594 4.47 653 5.25 707 6.04 763 6.91 819 7.86 874 8.89
537 4.55 592 5.35 636 6.00 683 6.74 735 7.64 783 8.53 831 9.47 880 10.48
362 1.09 449 1.57 536 2.16 618 2.84 689 3.52 753 4.24 812 4.99 867 5.77
435 2.19 496 2.70 563 3.35 628 4.04 693 4.83 757 5.71 817 6.63 873 7.53
511 3.85 567 4.56 614 5.18 667 5.96 720 6.80 771 7.66 824 8.60 876 9.63
590 6.21 642 7.16 685 7.97 724 8.69 766 9.54 812 10.54 856 11.55 898 12.56
644 8.26 692 9.35 735 10.33 772 11.17 807 11.97 844 12.91 885 14.00 926 15.13
386 1.40 463 1.90 540 2.48 618 3.18 691 3.94 755 4.70 814 5.48 869 6.30
461 2.67 518 3.23 578 3.88 639 4.61 698 5.39 759 6.26 818 8.22 874 8.21
537 4.55 592 5.35 636 6.00 683 6.74 735 7.64 783 8.53 831 9.47 880 10.48
617 7.19 667 8.21 710 9.10 747 9.87 785 10.68 827 11.66 870 12.73 911 13.80
685 10.08 731 11.26 772 12.36 809 13.33 842 14.20 874 15.08 910 16.10 948 17.28
351 1.49 423 2.09 502 3.00 572 4.02 634 5.07 690 6.09 740 7.04 784 7.91
412 2.68 460 3.15 521 3.96 585 5.02 646 6.24 702 7.53 754 8.83 801 10.14
478 4.41 516 4.88 557 5.54 607 6.49 662 7.66 715 9.01 766 10.48 814 12.01
547 6.75 578 7.36 612 7.92 647 8.71 688 9.77 735 11.03 781 12.46 827 14.03
617 9.83 644 10.59 672 11.22 702 11.88 732 12.77 766 13.89 805 15.22
9,000
12,000
14,000
16,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
20,000
10,000
13,000
16,000
19,000
21,500
12,000
C70 & -C75 15,000
18,000
21,000
24,000
Note:
Blocked areas of table identify nonstandard drive selections.
78
Table 4-4
20 through 75 Ton 50% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance
Negative Static Pressure
0.60" W.G. 0.80" W.G.
Cfm 0.20" W.G.
Std.
0.40" W.G.
1.00" W.G.
1.20" W.G. 1.40" W.G.
Air
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
364 0.17 487 0.30 582 0.45 658 0.58 731 0.73 797 0.90 856 1.08
435 0.36 522 0.51 614 0.67 694 0.88 765 1.11 830 1.34 886 1.54
529 0.76 592 0.86 654 1.03 728 1.29 797 1.51 861 1.77 919 2.05
623 1.32 687 1.56 735 1.67 778 1.79 836 2.13 896 2.45 953 2.72
722 2.13 779 2.47 830 2.72 890 2.86 905 2.96
S*HF-C20
S*HF-C25
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
3,000
5,000
7,000
9,000
11,000
3,000
5,000
7,000
9,000
11,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
10,000
12,000
13,000
S*HF-C30
S*HF-C40
364 0.17 487 0.30 582 0.45 658 0.58 731 0.73 797 0.90 856 1.08
435 0.36 522 0.51 614 0.67 694 0.88 765 1.11 830 1.34 886 1.54
529 0.76 592 0.86 654 1.03 728 1.29 797 1.51 861 1.77 919 2.05
623 1.32 687 1.56 735 1.67 778 1.79 836 2.13 896 2.45 953 2.72
722 2.13 779 2.47 830 2.72 870 2.86 905 2.96 944 3.16 994 3.59
824 3.23 874 3.64 922 4.02 965 4.30 1000 4.48 1032 4.59 1062 4.72
288 0.22 393 0.38 477 0.55 547 0.74 611 0.94 668 1.16 721 1.39
372 0.66 430 0.83 495 1.05 557 1.29 621 1.57 680 1.87 732 2.16
472 1.55 522 1.82 563 2.04 606 2.29 653 2.59 698 2.91 742 3.24
578 3.06 621 3.41 661 3.76 695 4.06 725 4.34 758 4.65 794 5.01
688 5.36 725 5.80 760 6.24 793 6.66 823 7.06 850 7.42 875 7.76
288 0.22 393 0.38 477 0.55 547 0.74 611 0.94 668 1.16 721 1.39
372 0.66 430 0.83 495 1.05 557 1.29 621 1.57 680 1.87 732 2.16
472 1.55 522 1.82 563 2.04 606 2.29 653 2.59 698 2.91 742 3.24
578 3.06 621 3.41 661 3.76 695 4.06 725 4.34 758 4.65 794 5.01
688 5.36 725 5.80 760 6.24 793 6.66 823 7.06 850 7.42 875 7.76
271 0.29 364 0.54 438 0.82 499 1.07 550 1.30 601 1.56 651 1.87
339 0.71 391 0.90 456 1.22 517 1.60 572 2.01 622 2.43 668 2.85
425 1.55 460 1.73 497 1.96 542 2.30 591 2.72 639 3.20 684 3.73
517 2.88 543 3.13 571 3.34 600 3.59 632 3.94 668 4.37 707 4.87
612 4.84 633 5.15 655 5.43 678 5.68 702 5.95 726 6.29 752 6.91
659 6.09 679 6.44 699 6.76 720 7.04 741 7.31
S*HF-C50
S*HF-C55
S*HF-C60
S*HF-C70
S*HF-C75
Note:
Blocked areas identify non-standard motor selections.
90 through 130 Ton 50% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance
CFM
STD
Negative Static Pressure
0.500" W.G. 0.750" W.G. 1.000" W.G.
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
0.250" W.G.
1.250" W.G.
1.500" W.G.
AIR
12,000
14,000
16,000
18,000
20,000
452
516
583
3.68
5.71
8.41
495
551
609
4.21
6.21
8.85
536
586
643
4.85
6.85
9.57
576
622
5.46
7.63
614
657
6.17
8.36
651
690
6.95
9.09
672 10.29 704 11.18 735 12.07
650 11.88 672 12.29 699 12.94 729 13.79 755 14.59 782 15.56
718 16.20 737 16.62 758 17.18 785 18.03 811 18.97 835 19.86
CFM
STD
Negative Static Pressure
1.750" W.G.
2.000" W.G.
2.250" W.G.
2.500" W.G.
AIR
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
12,000
14,000
16,000
18,000
20,000
687
723
7.73
9.96
722
8.55
759
9.46
797 10.45
754 10.88 785 11.79 815 12.72
764 12.84 793 13.72 822 14.72 850 15.76
811 16.62 838 17.53 864 18.41 889 19.39
859 20.87 885 22.05 910 23.18 934 24.17
Note:
Blocked areas identify non-standard motor selections.
79
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
Economizer Damper Adjustment
Exhaust Air Dampers
Verify that the exhaust dampers (if equipped) close tightly
when the unit is off. Adjust the damper linkage as necessary
to ensure proper closure. An access panel is provided un-
der each damper assembly.
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the unit
control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the applicable SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV
applications for the SERVICE TEST screens and
programming instructions.
Fresh Air & Return Air Damper Operation
The fresh air and return air damper linkage is accessible
from the filter section of the unit. The damper linkage con-
necting the fresh air dampers to the return air dampers is
preset from the factory in the number 1 position. Refer to
Table 4-5 for the appropriate linkage position for the unit
and operating airflow (CFM).
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system
components for operation by scrolling through the
displays;
WARNING
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
Fresh Air Dampers (Closed)
No Step Surface!
Do not walk on the sheet metal drain pan. Walking on
the drain pan could cause the supporting metal to col-
lapse. Failure of the drain pan could result in death or
serious injury.
6. Once the configuration for the components is complete,
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
Note: Bridging between the unit's main supports
may consist of multiple 2 by 12 boards or sheet
metal grating.
Arbitrarily adjusting the fresh air dampers to open fully
when the return air dampers are closed or; failing to main-
tain the return air pressure drop with the fresh air dampers
when the return air dampers are closed, can overload the
supply fan motor and cause building pressurization control
problems due to improper CFM being delivered to the
space.
WARNING
Rotating Components!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
The fresh air/return air damper linkage is connected to a
crank arm with a series of holes that allows the installer or
operator to modify the amount of fresh air damper travel in
order to match the return static pressure. Refer to
Table 4-5 for the equivalent return air duct losses that corre-
spond to each of the holes illustrated in Figure 4-5.
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before
the fan will begin to operate.
To Adjust the Fresh Air Damper Travel:
8. With the fresh air dampers fully closed and the supply fan
operating at 100% airflow requirements, measure the
return static pressure at the location determined in
step 1.
1. Drill a 1/4" hole through the unit casing up stream of the
return air dampers. Use a location that will produce an
accurate reading with the least amount of turbulence.
Several locations may be necessary, and average the
reading.
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.
10. Open the field supplied main power disconnect switch
upstream of the rooftop unit. Lock the disconnect switch
in the "Open" position while working on the dampers.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
11. Compare the static pressure reading to the static pres-
sure ranges and linkage positions in Table 4-5 for the
unit size and operating CFM.
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
80
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
To relocate the fresh air/return air connecting rod to balance
the fresh air damper pressure drop against the return static
pressure, use the following steps. If no adjustment is neces-
sary, proceed to step 17.
15. Reattach the drive rod and swivel to the appropriate
hole(s). The length of the drive rod may need to be
adjusted to align with the new hole(s) location. If so,
loosen the lock nut on the drive rod against the swivel.
Turn the swivel "in" or "out" to shorten or lengthen the rod
as necessary. For some holes, both ends of the rod may
need to be adjusted.
12. Remove the drive rod and swivel from the crank arm(s).
If only one hole requires changing, loosen only that end.
13. Manually open the return air dampers to the full open
position.
16. Tighten the lock nut against the swivel(s).
17. Plug the holes after the proper CFM has been
established.
14. Manually close the fresh air dampers.
Table 4-5
F/A Damper Travel Adjustment
Position of
Damper
Connecting Rod Crank Arm Hole
(See Figure 4-5)
Position #1
Position #2
Position #3
Position #4
Position #5
Position #6
Configuration
2 - 3
Use the tables below to select the appropriate
crank arm hole configuration based on the;
a. specific unit,
b. operating CFM,
c. and return static pressure.
2 - 4
2 - 5
2 - 6
1 - 8
1 - 7
Note:
As shipped from the factory, the connect rod is
installed in Position #1.
Fresh Air Damper Pressure Drop (inches w.c. )
50 - 55 Ton Units
20 and 25 Ton Units
Damper Position
#3 #4
0.03 0.04 0.06 0.13 0.16 0.33
0.03 0.04 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.90
0.19 0.21 0.32 0.52 0.75 1.75
0.30 0.35 0.48 0.76 1.08 2.40
Damper Position
#3 #4
10000 0.03 0.04 0.09 0.18 0.23 0.55
14000 0.09 0.12 0.20 0.35 0.50 1.36
18000 0.31 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.10
20000 0.45 0.51 0.70 1.05 1.57
22000 0.58 0.66 0.75 1.30 1.95
24000 0.75 0.88 1.10 1.75 2.50
CFM
4000
6000
8000
9000
#1
#2
#5
#6
CFM
#1
#2
#5
#6
-
-
-
-
10000 0.45 0.51 0.70 1.05 1.57
11000 0.62 0.71 0.95 1.42 2.15
-
-
30 Ton Units
60 - 75 Ton Units
Damper Position
Damper Position
CFM
6000
8000
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
CFM
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
0.03 0.04 0.07 0.15 0.20 0.43
0.03 0.05 0.11 0.21 0.30 0.90
14000 0.03 0.04 0.12 0.25 0.35 1.05
18000 0.19 0.21 0.32 0.52 0.75 1.75
10000 0.15 0.19 0.26 0.43 0.62 1.50
11000 0.20 0.25 0.37 0.60 0.85 1.85
12000 0.31 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.10 2.40
22000 0.45 0.51 0.70 1.05 1.57
26000 0.70 0.80 1.02 1.58 2.30
-
-
-
-
28000 0.88 1.03 1.30 2.20
30000 1.05 1.22 1.55 2.65
-
-
13000 0.42 0.48 0.62 0.97 1.42
-
40 Ton Units
90 - 130 Ton Units
Damper Position
Damper Position
CFM
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
CFM
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
8000
0.03 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.21 0.52
27000 0.31 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.10 2.40
10000 0.03 0.05 0.11 0.21 0.30 0.90
12000 0.10 0.13 0.21 0.38 0.55 1.40
14000 0.20 0.25 0.37 0.60 0.85 1.85
32000 0.55 0.64 0.72 1.25 1.88
36000 0.75 0.88 1.10 1.75 2.50
-
-
-
-
-
40000 1.00 1.18 1.50 2.50
-
-
-
16000 0.41 0.46 0.60 0.94 1.38
18000 0.56 0.65 0.74 1.28 1.92
-
-
43000 1.20 1.42 1.92
46000 1.40 1.58 2.29
-
-
81
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Figure 4-5
Fresh Air & Return Air Linkage Adjustment
4. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
5. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the RT-SVP01A-EN for CV applications or
Top View
RETURN AIR
DAMPERS
FRESH AIR
DAMPERS
RT-SVP02A-EN for VAV applications for the SERVICE
TEST screens and programming instructions.
6. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for operation by scrolling through the displays;
3
4
20 to 30 Ton
Compressor 1A (On)
Compressor 1B (Off)
Condenser Fans
1
8
5
2
40 through 60 Ton
Compressor 1A (On)
Compressor 1B (Off)
Compressor 2A (Off)
Compressor 2B (Off)
Condenser Fans
6
FILTER
7
SECTION
70 & 105 Ton
Compressor 1A & 1B (On)
Compressor 1C (Off)
Compressor 2A & 2B (Off)
Compressor 2C (Off)
Condenser Fans
115 & 130 Ton
Compressor 1A & 1B (On)
Compressor 1C & 1D (Off)
Compressor 2A & 2B (Off)
Compressor 2C & 2D (Off)
Condenser Fans
7. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and dis-
charge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to Figure 4-6
for the various compressor locations.
Compressor Start-Up
(All Systems)
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote
panel is in the "Off" position.
8. Once the configuration for the components is complete,
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
2. Before closing the disconnect switch, ensure that the
compressor discharge service valve and the liquid line
service valve for each circuit is back seated.
CAUTION
Compressor Damage!
WARNING
Rotating Components!
Do not allow liquid refrigerant to enter the suction line.
Excessive liquid accumulation in the liquid lines may
result in compressor damage.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
COMPRESSOR SERVICE VALVES MUST BE FULLY
OPENED BEFORE START-UP (SUCTION, DISCHARGE,
LIQUID LINE, AND OIL LINE).
9. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 8 must elapse before
the system will begin to operate.
3. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal block
1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14 to allow
the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours be-
fore continuing.
10. Once each compressor or compressor pair has started,
verify that the rotation is correct. If a scroll compressor is
rotating backwards, it will not pump and a loud rattling
sound can be observed. Check the electrical phasing at
the load side of the compressor contactor. If the phasing
is correct, before condemning the compressor, inter-
Note: Compressor Damage could occur if the
crankcase heater is not allowed to operate the
minimum of 8 hours before starting the
compressor(s).
82
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
change any two leads to check the internal motor phas-
ing. If the compressor runs backward for an extended
period (15 to 30 minutes), the motor winding can over
heat and cause the motor winding thermostats to open.
This will cause a “compressor trip” diagnostic and stop
the compressor.
Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the atmosphere!
If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the
service technician must comply with all Federal,
State and local laws. Refer to general service
bulletin MSCU-SB-1 (latest edition).
7. Verify that the oil level in each compressor is correct. The
oil level may be down to the bottom of the sightglass but
should never be above the sightglass.
11. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the compressor operation.
12. Repeat steps 5 through 11 for each compressor stage
and the appropriate condenser fans.
8. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.
Refrigerant Charging
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for the number 2 refrigeration
circuit.
1. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and dis-
charge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to Figure 4-6
for the various compressor locations.
10. After shutting the system off, check the compressor's
oil’s appearance. Discoloration of the oil indicates that an
abnormal condition has occurred. If the oil is dark and
smells burnt, it has overheated because of: compressor
is operating at extremely high condensing temperatures;
high superheat; a compressor mechanical failure; or, oc-
currence of a motor burnout.
2. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the SAHF-PTG-1B for CV applications or SAHF-PTG-
2B for VAV applications for the SERVICE TEST screens
and programming instructions.
If the oil is black and contains metal flakes, a mechanical
failure has occurred. This symptom is often accompanied
by a high compressor amperage draw.
3. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for the number 1 refrigeration circuit by scrolling
through the displays;
If a motor burnout is suspected, use an acid test kit to
check the condition of the oil. Test results will indicate an
acid level exceeding 0.05 mg KOH/g if a burnout oc-
curred.
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes/VFD (100%, if applicable)
OCC/UNOCC Relay (Unoccupied for VAV units)
All Compressors for each circuit (On)
Condenser Fans for each circuit (On)
The scroll compressor uses Trane OIL-42 without substi-
tution. The appropriate oil charge for a 9 and 10 Ton
scroll compressor is 8.5 pints. For a 14 and 15 Ton scroll
compressor, use 13.8 pints.
4. Once the configuration for the components is complete,
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to
confirm this choice.
Compressor Crankcase Heaters
9 and 10 ton scroll compressors have a 100-watt heater in-
stalled. 14 and 15 ton scroll compressors have two 80-watt
heaters installed per compressor.
Compressor Operational Sounds
WARNING
Because of the scroll compressor design, it emits a higher
frequency tone (sound) than a reciprocating compressor. It
is designed to accommodate liquids, both oil and refriger-
ant, without causing compressor damage. The following dis-
cussion describes some of the operational sounds that dif-
ferentiate it from those typically associated with a recipro-
cating compressor. These sounds do not affect the opera-
tion or reliability of the compressor.
Rotating Components!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
5. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 4 must elapse before
the system will begin to operate.
At Shutdown
When a Scroll compressor shuts down, the gas within the
scroll expands and causes momentary reverse rotation until
the discharge check valve closes. This results in a “flutter”
type sound.
6. After all of the compressors and condenser fans for the
number 1 circuit have been operating for approximately
30 minutes, observe the operating pressures. Use the
appropriate pressure curve in Tables 4-6 to determine
the proper operating pressures. For superheat and sub-
cooling guidelines, refer to "Thermostatic Expansion
Valves and Charging by Subcooling" at the end of this
section.
At Low Ambient Start-Up
When the compressor starts up under low ambient condi-
tions, the initial flow rate of the compressor is low due to the
low condensing pressure. This causes a low differential
across the thermal expansion valve that limits its capacity.
Under these conditions, it is not unusual to hear the com-
pressor rattle until the suction pressure climbs and the flow
rate increases.
83
Figure 4-6
Compressor Locations
84
Table 4-6
20 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
360
340
105 F OD Ambient
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
95 F OD Ambient
85 F OD Ambient
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
25 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
340
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
105 F OD Ambient
95 F OD Ambient
85 F OD Ambient
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
85
Table 4-6 (Continued)
30 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
95 F OD Ambient
85 F OD Ambient
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
40 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
280
85 F OD Ambient
260
75 F OD Ambient
240
220
200
180
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
86
Table 4-6 (Continued)
50 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
95 F OD Ambient
85 F OD Ambient
340
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
55 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
55 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)
Full Load
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
85 F OD Ambient
280
260
240
220
200
180
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
Suction Pressure, PSIG
87
Table 4-6 (Continued)
55 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
55 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)
Full Load
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
85 F OD Ambient
280
260
75 F OD Ambient
240
65 F OD Ambient
220
200
180
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
Suction Pressure, PSIG
60 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
85 F OD Ambient
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
88
Table 4-6 (Continued)
60 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")
60 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)
Full Load
105 F OD Ambient
320
300
95 F OD Ambient
280
85 F OD Ambient
260
240
75 F OD Ambient
220
65 F OD Ambient
200
180
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
Suction Pressure, PSIG
70 Ton Standard Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
70 Ton Standard Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)
Full Load
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
280
85 F OD Ambient
260
75 F OD Ambient
240
220
65 F OD Ambient
200
180
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
Suction Pressure, PSIG
89
Table 4-6 (Continued)
75 Ton Standard Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
75 Ton Std Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)
Full Load
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
95 F OD Ambient
340
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
85 F OD Ambient
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
Suction Pressure, PSIG
75 Ton Hi-Cap Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
75 Ton Hi-Cap Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)
Full Load
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
85 F OD Ambient
280
260
75 F OD Ambient
240
65 F OD Ambient
220
200
180
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
Suction Pressure, PSIG
90
Table 4-6 (Continued)
90 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
95 F OD Ambient
340
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
85 F OD Ambient
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
105 Ton Standard & Hi-Cap Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
340
105 F OD Ambient
320
95 F OD Ambient
85 F OD Ambient
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
91
Table 4-6 (Continued)
115 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
360
105 F OD Ambient
340
320
95 F OD Ambient
300
85 F OD Ambient
280
260
240
220
200
180
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
130 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt;
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)
FULL LOAD
380
105 F OD Ambient
360
340
95 F OD Ambient
320
85 F OD Ambient
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
75 F OD Ambient
65 F OD Ambient
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG
To Check Operating Pressures
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)
entering the condenser coil.
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)
next to the compressor.
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the
discharge pressure. The measured discharge
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.
92
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Thermostatic Expansion Valves
With the unit operating at "Full Circuit Capacity", acceptable
subcooling ranges between 14 F to 22 F.
The reliability and performance of the refrigeration system
is heavily dependent upon proper expansion valve adjust-
ment. Therefore, the importance of maintaining the proper
superheat cannot be over emphasized. Accurate measure-
ments of superheat will provide the following information.
Measuring Subcooling
1. At the liquid line service valve, measure the liquid line
pressure. Using a Refrigerant 22 pressure/temperature
chart, convert the pressure reading into the correspond-
ing saturated temperature.
1. How well the expansion valve is controlling the refriger-
ant flow.
2. Measure the actual liquid line temperature as close to the
liquid line service valve as possible. To ensure an accu-
rate reading, clean the line thoroughly where the tem-
perature sensor will be attached. After securing the sen-
sor to the line, insulate the sensor and line to isolate it
from the ambient air.
2. The efficiency of the evaporator coil.
3. The amount of protection the compressor is receiving
against flooding or overheating.The recommended range
for superheat is 10 to 16 degrees at the evaporator. Sys-
tems operating with less than 10 degrees of superheat:
Note: Glass thermometers do not have sufficient
contact area to give an accurate reading.
a. Could cause serious compressor damage due to
refrigerant floodback.
3. Determine the system subcooling by subtracting the ac-
tual liquid line temperature (measured in step 2) from
the saturated liquid temperature (converted in step 1).
b. Removes working surface from the evaporator
normally used for heat transfer.
Low Ambient Dampers
Systems operating with superheat in excess of 16 degrees:
Operation
a. Could cause excessive compressor cycling on
internal winding thermostat which leads to
compressor motor failure.
Low Ambient Dampers are available as a factory installed
option on 20 - 75 Ton units or can be field-installed. Damp-
ers are used to extend the operation of these units from the
standard operational temperatures to a minimum of 0F
without hot gas bypass or 10F with hot gas bypass. (These
values apply when wind speed across the condenser coil is
less than 5 m.p.h. If typical wind speeds are higher than 5
m.p.h., a wind screen around the unit may be required.) By
restricting the airflow across the condenser coils, saturated
condensing temperatures can be maintained as the ambient
temperatures change.
b. Lowers the efficiency of the evaporator by reducing
the heat transfer capability.
Tables are based on outdoor ambient between 65 & 105 F,
relative humidity above 40 percent. Measuring the operat-
ing pressures can be meaningless outside of these ranges.
Measuring Superheat
1. Measure the suction pressure at the suction line gauge
The low ambient modulating output(s) on the compressor
module controls the low ambient damper actuator for each
refrigerant circuit in response to saturated condensing tem-
perature.
access port located near the compressor.
2. Using a Refrigerant/Temperature chart, convert the pres-
sure reading to a corresponding saturated vapor tem-
perature.
When the control has staged up to it's highest stage (stage
2 or 3 depending on unit size), the modulating output will be
at 100% (10 VDC). When the control is at stage 1, the
modulating output (0 to 10 VDC) will control the saturated
condensing temperature to within the programmable "con-
densing temperature low ambient control point".
3. Measured the suction line temperature as close to the
expansion valve bulb, as possible.
4. Subtract the saturated vapor temperature obtained in
step 2 from the actual suction line temperature obtained
in step 3. The difference between the two temperatures
is known as "superheat".
The following Table gives the minimum starting tempera-
tures for both "Standard" & "Low" Ambient units. Do not
start the unit in the cooling mode if the ambient temperature
is below the recommended operating temperatures.
When adjusting superheat, recheck the system subcooling
before shutting the system "Off".
Minimum Starting Ambient (1)
Charging by Subcooling
Standard (2)
Low Ambient
without
with
HGBP
10°
The outdoor ambient temperature must be between 65 and
105 F and the relative humidity of the air entering the
evaporator must be above 40 percent. When the tempera-
tures are outside of these ranges, measuring the operating
pressures can be meaningless.
Unit Size
20 & 40
25 & 30
70 - 130
55
HGBP
0°
55°
50°
45°
40°
35°
30°
10°
0°
10°
0°
10°
0°
Do not attempt to charge the system with the low ambient
dampers and/or hot gas bypass operating (if applicable).
Disable the low ambient dampers in the "Open" position (re-
fer to the "Low Ambient Damper" section) and de-energize
the hot gas bypass valves before taking performance mea-
surements.
50
10°
0°
60
10°
0°
Notes:
1. Min. starting ambients in degrees F and is based on unit operating
at min. step of unloading & unloading & 5 mph wind across condenser.
2. With or Without HGBP
93
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Damper Installation
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for operation by scrolling through the Human Inter-
face displays;
When a unit is ordered with the low ambient option (i.e.,
Digit 19 is a “1” in the model number), a damper is factory
installed over the condenser fans 2B1, 2B4, 2B13 & 2B14
(depending on unit size). Refer to the illustration in
Figure 4-1 for the damper locations.
Electric Heat
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if
applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
Heat Stages 1 & 2 (On)
For field installation, mount the dampers over the con-
denser fans at the locations shown in Figure 4-1 and con-
nect the actuator for each circuit. (Refer to the Installation
Instructions provided with each kit.)
Damper Adjustment (Factory or Field Installed)
The UCM has a factory default setpoint of 90F. This set-
point can be adjusted using the Human Interface program-
ming procedures.
Steam or Hot Water Heat
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if
applicable)
Inspect the damper blades for proper alignment and opera-
tion. Dampers should be in the closed position during the
"Off" cycle. If adjustment is required;
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
Hydronic Heat Actuator (100% Open)
Open the main steam or hot water valve supplying
the rooftop heater coils.
1. At the Human Interface, program the actuator for 0% on
circuit #1 and/or circuit #2. (The output signal will go to
0.0 VDC.)
6. Once the configuration for the appropriate heating sys-
tem is complete, press the NEXT key until the LCD dis-
plays the “Start test in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to
designate the delay before the test is to start. This ser-
vice test will begin after the TEST START key is pressed
and the delay designated in this step has elapsed. Press
the ENTER key to confirm this choice.
2. Loosen the damper shaft "Locking" set screws on the ac-
tuator
3. Firmly hold the damper blades in the closed position
4. Retighten the "Locking" set screws.
WARNING
Rotating Components!
To check damper operation, program the actuator for 100%
on circuit #1 and/or circuit #2. (The output signal will go to
10 VDC and the damper will drive to the full open position.
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product it may be necessary to measure the
speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li-
censed service individual who has been properly
trained in handling exposed rotating components, per-
form these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precau-
tions when exposed to rotating components could re-
sult in death or serious injury.
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up
(Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Systems)
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote
panel is in the "Off" position.
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before
the fan will begin to operate.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
8. Once the system has started, verify that the electric heat
or the hydronic heat system is operating properly by us-
ing appropriate service technics; i.e. amperage readings,
delta tees, etc..
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
Gas Furnace Start-Up
(Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Systems)
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.
It is important to establish and maintain the appropriate air/
fuel mixture to assure that the gas furnace operates safely
and efficiently.
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-
ming instructions.
Since the proper manifold gas pressure for a particular in-
stallation will vary due to the specific BTU content of the lo-
cal gas supply, adjust the burner based on carbon dioxide
and oxygen levels.
94
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
The volume of air supplied by the combustion blower deter-
mines the amount of oxygen available for combustion, while
the manifold gas pressure establishes fuel input. By mea-
suring the percentage of carbon dioxide produced as a by-
product of combustion, the operator can estimate the
amount of oxygen used and modify the air volume or the
gas pressure to obtain the proper air/fuel ratio.
the heat exchanger. In appearance, a normal flame has
a clearly defined shape, and is primarily (75%) blue in
color with an orange tip.
5. Check the manifold gas pressure by using the manifold
pressure port on the gas valve. Refer to Table 4-7 for the
required manifold pressure for high-fire operation. If it
needs adjusting, remove the cap covering the high-fire
adjustment screw on the gas valve. Refer to Figure 4-8
for the adjustment screw location. Turn the screw clock-
wise to increase the gas pressure or counterclockwise to
decrease the gas pressure.
Arriving at the correct air/fuel mixture for a furnace results in
rated burner output, limited production of carbon monoxide,
and a steady flame that minimizes nuisance shutdowns.
6. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. Refer to the illus-
tration in Figure 4-7. Take several samples to assure that
an accurate reading is obtained. Refer to Table 4-7 for
the proper carbon dioxide levels. A carbon dioxide level
exceeding the listed range indicates incomplete combus-
tion due to inadequate air or excessive gas.
WARNING
Hazardous Gases and Flammable Vapors!
Exposure to hazardous gases from fuel substances
have been shown to cause cancer, birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Improper installation, adjust-
ment, alteration, service or use of this product could
cause flammable mixtures. To avoid hazardous gases
and flammable vapors follow proper installation and set
up of this product and all warnings as provided in this
manual. Failure to follow all instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
When using dry nitrogen cylinders for pressurizing
units for leak testing, always provide a pressure regula-
tor on the cylinder to prevent excessively high unit
pressures. Never pressurize unit above the maximum
recommended unit test pressure as specified in appli-
cable unit literature. Failure to properly regulate pres-
sure could result in a violent explosion, which could re-
sult in death or serious injury or equipment or prop-
erty-only-damage.
Combustion Air Adjustment (O2 )
7. Use an oxygen analyzer and measure the percentage of
oxygen in the flue gas. Take several samples to assure
an accurate reading. Compare the measured oxygen
level to the combustion curve in Table 4-8. The oxygen
content of the flue gas should be 4% to 5%. If the oxygen
level is outside this range, adjust the combustion air
damper to increase or decrease the amount of air enter-
ing the combustion chamber. Refer to Figure 4-10 for the
location of the combustion air damper .
8. Recheck the oxygen and carbon dioxide levels after each
adjustment. After completing the high-fire checkout and
adjustment procedure, the low-fire setting may require
adjusting.
Two Stage Gas Furnace
Low-Fire Adjustment
(500 MBH, 850 & 1,000 MBH only)
1. Use the TEST initiation procedures outlined in the previ-
ous section to operate the furnace in the low-fire state
(1st Stage).
High-Fire Adjustment
1. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for operation by scrolling through the Human Inter-
face displays;
2. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. Refer to the illus-
tration in Figure 4-7, Inset A. Take several samples to as-
sure that an accurate reading is obtained. Refer to
Table 4-8 for the proper carbon dioxide levels. If the
measured carbon dioxide level is within the listed values,
no adjustment is necessary. A carbon dioxide level ex-
ceeding the listed range indicates incomplete combus-
tion due to inadequate air or excessive gas.
Gas Heat
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if
applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
Heat Stages 1 & 2 (On)
Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 4S24
located in the heater control panel to the "On"
position.
3. Check the manifold gas pressure by using the manifold
pressure port on the gas valve. Refer to Table 4-8 for the
required manifold pressure during low-fire operation. If it
needs adjusting, remove the cap covering the low-fire
adjustment screw on the gas valve. Refer to Figure 4-8
for the adjustment screw location. Turn the screw clock-
wise to increase the gas pressure or counterclockwise to
decrease the gas pressure.
Open the manual gas valve, located in the gas
heat section.
2. Once the configuration for the appropriate heating sys-
tem is complete, press the NEXT key until the LCD dis-
plays the “Start test in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to
designate the delay before the test is to start. This ser-
vice test will begin after the TEST START key is pressed
and the delay designated in this step has elapsed. Press
the ENTER key to confirm this choice.
Note: Do not adjust the combustion air damper
while the furnace is operating at low-fire.
3. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 2 must elapse before
the system will begin to operate.
4. Check the carbon dioxide levels after each adjustment.
5. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.
4. Once the system has started, check the appearance of
the flame through the sight glass provided on the front of
95
Table 4-7
Figure 4-7
Recommended Manifold Pressures and CO2 Levels
during Furnace Operation (See Notes)
Flue Gas Carbon Dioxide & Oxygen Measurements
Furnace
Stage
MBH
Firing
Rate
100%
50%
100%
50%
100%
50%
100%
59%
Manifold
%CO2
Pressure
3.0-3.5
0.9
High-Fire
Low-Fire
High-Fire
Low-Fire
High-Fire
Low-Fire
High-Fire
Low-Fire
High-Fire
Low-Fire
235
117
350
175
500
250
850
500
1000
500
8.5-9.5
6.0-7.0
8.5-9.5
6.0-7.0
8.5-9.5
6.0-7.0
8.5-9.5
6.0-7.0
8.5-9.5
6.0-7.0
3.0-3.5
0.9
3.0-3.5
1.25
3.0-3.5
1.25
100%
50%
3.0-3.5
1.25
Manifold pressures are given in inches w.c.
High fire manifold pressure is adjustable on all heaters.
Low fire manifold pressure is non-adjustable on 235 MBH
and 350 MBH heaters.
Table 4-8
Natural Gas Combustion Curve
(Ratio of Oxygen to Carbon Dioxide in percent)
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Curve
A
Fuel
=
1,000 BTU per cu. ft.
of Natural Gas.
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Percent Oxygen
Figure 4-8
Gas Valve Adjustment Screw Locations
96
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Full Modulating Gas Furnace
WARNING
Rotating Components!
Full Modulating gas heaters are available for the 500, 850
and 1000 MBH heater sizes. These heaters are available in
the same cabinet sizes as the current heaters.
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-
ing of this product it may be necessary to measure the
speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li-
censed service individual who has been properly
trained in handling exposed rotating components, per-
form these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precau-
tions when exposed to rotating components could re-
sult in death or serious injury.
The firing rate of the unit can vary from the pilot rate of 125
MBH up to the nameplate rating of the unit. The turn down
ratios, therefore, vary from 4:1 for the 500 MBH to 8:1 for
the 1000 MBH heater.
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger drum, tubes and front and rear head-
ers are constructed from AL-6XN or 25-6MO, two of the
most corrosion resistant stainless steel alloys available.
4. Once the system has started, check the appearance of
the flame through the sight glass provided on the front of
the heat exchanger. In appearance, a normal flame has
a clearly defined shape, and is primarily (75%) blue in
color with an orange tip.
Unit control
The unit is controlled by a supply air temperature sensor lo-
cated in the supply air stream for VAV units. CV units have
two sensors, one located in the supply air stream and the
zone sensor. The temperature sensor signal is sent to the
5. Check the inlet gas pressure at the modulating gas valve.
The inlet pressure should be 6" to 8" w.c..
Heat module of the Intellipak® Unit Control. The control sig-
nal from the Heat Module is an inverse proportional 5 -10V
DC. The higher the voltage signal, the lower the call for
heat.
6. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. Refer to the illus-
tration in Figure 4-7. Take several samples to assure that
an accurate reading is obtained. If the measured carbon
dioxide level is between 8.0% and 9.5%, no adjustment
is necessary. If the CO2 is outside this range, it indicates
incomplete combustion due to inadequate air or exces-
sive gas.
The 5 -10V DC. signal controls the angular position of the
combustion air damper through a direct coupled damper ac-
tuator motor. The position of the air damper in turn controls
the combustion air pressure that is sensed by the modulat-
ing gas valve. The greater the combustion air pressure, the
greater the call for gas and the higher the firing rate of the
heater. As the temperature setpoint is reached, the Modu-
lating Heat control will cause the combustion air actuator to
change the damper position to a lower firing rate that
matches the heat load of the space.
The pressure ratio and bias adjustment screws are lo-
cated on top of the regulator under a sealed plate. The
actual settings can be seen through windows on each
side of the regulator. Refer to the illustration in
Figure 4-9.
1. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-
nents for operation by scrolling through the Human Inter-
face displays;
Note: The burner capacity is controlled by the
movement of the air damper. This has been preset
at the factory and normally does not need field
adjustment. The combustion quality (air/gas) is
controlled by the settings on the regulator (the plus
(+) and minus (-) indications relate to the change in
gas flow.
Gas Heat
Supply Fan (On)
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if
applicable)
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)
High Fire (90%)
Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 4S24
located in the heater control panel to the "On"
position.
7. Set the air/gas ratio to the desired value using the #1 ad-
justment screw until the optimum values between (8.0
and 9.5%) are obtained (course setting).
8. Use Table 4-1 to program the minimum (5%) firing rate.
Allow the system to operate for approximately 10 min-
utes.
Open the manual gas valve, located in the gas
heat section.
2. Once the configuration for the appropriate heating sys-
tem is complete, press the NEXT key until the LCD dis-
plays the “Start test in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to
designate the delay before the test is to start. This ser-
vice test will begin after the TEST START key is pressed
and the delay designated in this step has elapsed. Press
the ENTER key to confirm this choice.
9. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. If the measured
carbon dioxide level is between 6.0% and 8.0%, no ad-
justment is necessary. If an adjustment is needed, turn
the #2 adjustment screw on the regulator in the Plus (+)
direction to increase the CO2 and in the Minus (-) direc-
tion to decrease the CO2. Refer to the illustration in Fig-
ure 4-9 for the adjustment screw location.
3. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember
that the delay designated in step 2 must elapse before
the system will begin to operate.
Note: It is normal for the low fire CO2 to be lower
than the high fire.
97
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
2. Follow the checkout procedures discussed in the previ-
ous steps.
10. If the measured carbon dioxide level is below the rec-
ommended values for low heat, return the burner to 90%
fire rate and repeat steps 6 and 7, to achieve optimum
combustion.
Note: The minimum firing rate for a limited
modulating gas furnace in step 8 is 33%. Travel of
the combustion air damper is limited by a welded
stop.
11. Program the burner for 100% operation and recheck the
CO2 or O2 value.
12. Check the flue gas values at several intermediate out-
put levels. If corrections are necessary;
3. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.
- Adjust the pressure ratio screw 1 at high fire operation
only.
Figure 4-9
Modulating Gas Regulator
- Adjust the bias screw 2 at low fire operation only.
13. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace
Limited Modulating gas heaters are available for the 500,
850 and 1000 MBH heater sizes. These heaters are avail-
able in the same cabinet sizes as the current heaters.
The firing rate of the unit can vary from 33% rated MBH up
to the nameplate rating of the unit. The turn down ratios,
therefore, is limited to 3:1.
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger drum, tubes and front and rear head-
ers utilities the same materials as the standard two stage
furnace.
Unit control
The unit is controlled by a supply air temperature sensor lo-
cated in the supply air stream for VAV units. CV units have
two sensors, one located in the supply air stream and the
zone sensor. The temperature sensor signal is sent to the
Heat module of the Intellipak® Unit Control. The control sig-
nal from the Heat Module is an inverse proportional 5 -10V
DC. The higher the voltage signal, the lower the call for
heat.
The 5 -10V DC. signal controls the angular position of the
combustion air damper through a direct coupled damper ac-
tuator motor. The position of the air damper in turn controls
the combustion air pressure that is sensed by the modulat-
ing gas valve. The greater the combustion air pressure, the
greater the call for gas and the higher the firing rate of the
heater. As the temperature setpoint is reached, the Modu-
lating Heat control will cause the combustion air actuator to
change the damper position to a lower firing rate that
matches the heat load of the space.
Modulating Gas Regulator Legend
1. Adjustment and indication of the air to gas ratio.
2. Adjustment and indication of the bias.
3. Connection for the Ambient compensation line.
4. Connection for the gas pressure sensing line.
5. Connection for the air pressure sensing line.
6. Stroke indication.
1. To verify and check system optimum combustion, use
Table 4-1 to program the limited modulating heat system
components for 90% operation by scrolling through the
Human Interface displays.
Note: There are no serviceable parts on the SKP70
actuator. Should it become inoperative, replace the
actuator.
98
Unit Start-Up (Continued)
Final Unit Checkout
Figure 4-10
Typical Gas Furnace
After completing all of the checkout and start-up procedures
outlined in the previous sections (i.e., operating the unit in
each of its Modes through all available stages of cooling
and heating), perform these final checks before leaving the
unit:
[ ] Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
[ ] Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 "Off".
[ ] Turn the 24 volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On"
position.
[ ] At the Human Interface Module, press the "SETUP" key.
The LCD screen will display various preset "parameters
of operation" based on the unit type, size, and the in-
stalled options. Compare the factory preset information
to the specified application requirements. If adjustments
are required, follow the step-by-step instructions pro-
vided in the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or
VAV applications.
[ ] Program the Night Setback (NSB) panel (if applicable) for
proper unoccupied operation. Refer to the programming
instructions for the specific panel.
[ ] Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch,
"Fan" selection switch, and "Zone Temperature" settings
for constant volume systems are correct.
[ ] Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch
and the "Supply Air Temperature" settings for variable air
volume systems are correct.
[ ] Inspect the unit for misplaced tools, hardware, and de-
bris.
[ ] Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 "On".
[ ] Press the "AUTO" key at the Human Interface Module to
begin system operation. The system will start automati-
cally once the dampers modulate and a request for either
heating or cooling has been given.
[ ] Verify that all exterior panels including the control panel
doors and condenser grilles are secured in place.
99
Service & Maintenance
Table 5-1
Control Settings and Time Delays
Control Description
Elec. Designation
Contacts Open
Contacts Closed
Compressor Circuit Breakers
S*HF 20 - 60
S*HG 90 - 130
1CB8 thru 1CB11
1CB14 thru 1CB17
See Table 5-2
See Table 5-2
See Table 5-2
See Table 5-2
Combustion Airflow Switch
(Gas Heat Only)
High Limit Cutout
(Gas Heat Only)
Supply Airflow Switch
(Gas Heat Only)
Disch High Limit
(Electric Heat Only)
Linear High Limit
(Electric Heat Only)
4S25
4S26
4S38
4S27
4S33
see note 1
250 + 15 F
0.1 - 0.25" wc rise in press diff
210 F
0.03 - 0.12" wc
133 + 5 F
0.15 + 0.05" wc rise in press diff
110 + 5 F
185 + 10 F (std./UL)
165 F + 10 F (CSA)
145 F (std./UL)
125 F (CSA)
Freezestat
(Hydronic Heat Only)
Gas Heat Units
4S12
(N.O.) Auto Reset
40 F
Prepurge Timer: Fenwall
Honeywell
Sequencing Time Delay Relay
Notes:
4DL5
4U18
4DL6
N.C. - timed to close
internal timing function
N.C. - timed to close
60 seconds
60 seconds
60 seconds + 20%
1. The combustion airflow switch (4S25) differential is 0.02" - 0.08" wc.
Table 5-2
Compressor Circuit Breakers (1CB8 - 1CB11 & 1CB14 - 1CB17) Electrical Characteristics
200V
230V
460V
575V
Unit
Size
20
Compr.
Desig.
A& B
B
A
A& B
1,2A& 1,2B
1B, 2B
1A, 2A
1,2A& 1,2B
1,2A& 1,2B
1,2C
1,2A& 1,2B
1,2C
1,2A& 1,2B
1,2C
Compr.
Size
9 ton
14 ton
9 ton
14 ton
9 ton
14 ton
9 ton
14 ton
14 ton
14 ton
9 ton
Must
Hold
51
76
51
76
51
76
51
76
76
76
51
76
51
76
51
76
51
76
Must
Trip
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
87.4
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
Must
Hold
51
76
51
76
51
76
51
76
76
76
51
76
51
76
51
76
51
76
Must
Trip
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
87.4
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
58.7
87.4
Must
Hold
22.2
33
22.2
33
22.2
33
22.2
33
33
33
22.2
33
22.2
33
Must
Trip
25.5
38
25.5
38
25.5
38
25.5
38
38
38
25.5
38
25.5
38
Must
Hold
17.7
26.4
17.7
26.4
17.7
26.4
17.7
26.4
26.4
26.4
17.7
26.4
17.7
26.4
17.7
26.4
17.7
26.4
Must
Trip
20.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
30.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
25
30
40
50
55
60
70
75 Std.
75
Hi-Cap 1,2A& 1,2B
90
14 ton
9 ton
15 ton
10 ton
15 ton
10 ton
15 ton
22.2
33
22.2
33
25.5
38
25.5
38
1,2B & 1,2C
1,2A
105 1A,1B & 1C
2A,2B & 2C
115 1,2C & 1,2D
1,2A& 1,2B
130 1,2C & 1,2D
1,2A& 1,2B
15 ton
10 ton
14 ton
76
51
76
87.4
58.7
87.4
76
51
76
87.4
58.7
87.4
33
22.2
33
38
25.5
38
26.4
17.7
26.4
30.4
20.4
30.4
100
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Table 5-3
Unit Internal Fuse Replacement Data & VFD Factory Settings
101
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Table 5-4
Filter Data
Panel-Type Filters
(Note 1)
Bag-Type Filters
(Note 2)
Cartridge Filters
(box-type) (Note 2)
Panel-Type Prefilters
(Note 3)
Unit Model
Qty
12
Size of each
20 X 20 X 2
Qty. Size of each Qty. Size of each Qty.
Size of each
12 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
12 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
12 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
12 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
12 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
20 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
20 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
S_HF-C20 &
C25
S_HF-C30
4
3
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
12 X 24 X 19
24 X 24 X 19
4
3
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
12 X 24 X 12
24 X 24 X 12
4
3
16
16
20
35
25
25
20 X 20 X 2
20 X 25 X 2
20 X 25 X 2
16 X 20 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
24 X 24 X 2
2
2
2
6
6
6
S_HF-C40
5
5
5
6
6
6
S_HF-C50 &
C55
3
3
3
9
9
9
S_HF-C60,
C70 & C75
S_HG-C90 &
S_HG-D11
S_HG-D12 &
S_HG-D13
Notes:
6
6
6
8
8
8
3
3
3
15
3
15
3
15
3
15
15
15
1. Dimensions shown for “Panel-Type Filters”apply to “Throw away”, “Cleanable Wire Mesh”,
and “High Efficiency Throw away” Filters.
2. S_HF units ordered with “Bag-Type Filters” or “Cartridge Filters” (box-type) include a bank
of “Panel-Type Prefilters”.
3. The same “Panel-Type Prefilters” are used with “Bag-Type” and “Cartridge (box-type)” filters.
Table 5-5
"Wet Heat" Coil Fin Data
Total Coil
Face Area
(sq.ft.)
Fins
per
Foot
Fins
per
Foot
Coil
Type
Coil
Rows
Model
SLHF-C20,
C25 & C30
WC
Prima Flo
(hot water)
WC
Prima Flo
(hot water)
WC
Prima Flo
(hot water)
WC
Prima Flo
(hot water)
NS
(steam)
NS
(steam)
NS
(steam)
NS
(steam)
2
2
2
13.75
19.25
26.25
80
80
80
110
110
110
SLHF-C40,
C50 & C55
SLHF-C60,
C70 & C75
SLHG-C90,
D11, D12
& D13
2
1
1
1
1
17.5 (2)
13.75
80
42
42
42
52
110
96
96
72
96
SSHF-C20,
C25 & C30
SSHF-C40,
C50 & C55
SSHF-C60,
C70 & C75
SLHG-C90,
D11, D12
& D13
13.75 (1)
5.5 (1)
18.75 (1)
7.5 (1)
17.5 (2)
Note:
To determine unit heating capacity (i.e., “low heat” or “high heat”),
see Digit 9 of the model number stamped on the unit nameplate.
102
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Table 5-6
Grease Recommendations
Recommended
Recommended Grease
Exxon Unirex #2
Mobil 532
Operating Range
-20 F to 250 F
Mobil SHC #220
Texaco Premium RB
Table 5-7
Refrigerant Coil Fin Data
Coil
Fin
Fins
per
Foot
148
148
156
148
148
156
148
148
168
148
148
168
148
148
168
148
148
144
164
148
168
180
n/a
168
148
148
168
148
148
156
180
148
156
148
n/a
Coil Face
Area
Coil
Type
Tube
Coil
Rows
2
4
3
2
4
3
3
4
3
2
4
3
3
4
3
3
4
4
2
4
4
3
n/a
4
4
5
4
3
5
3
3
5
Tube
Type
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
n/a
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
I-F
smooth
I-F
n/a
smooth
I-F
n/a
smooth
Model
Config.
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
Dia.
0.5"
0.5"
(sq. ft.)
20.30
20.30
35.00
20.30
20.30
35.00
24.40
24.40
46.30
32.50
32.50
63.20
37.90
37.90
70.00
37.90
37.90
70.00
43.10
43.10
88.00
43.10
n/a
88.00
43.10
43.10
88.00
59.30
59.30
152.00
60.40
60.40
152.00
60.40
n/a
S*HF-C20 Evaporator
Condenser
S*HF-C25 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HF-C30 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HF-C40 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HF-C50 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HF-C55 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HF-C60 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HF-C70 Evaporator
Hi-Cap Evaporator
Condenser
S*HF-C75 Evaporator
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
n/a
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
0.5"
n/a
0.5"
0.5"
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
Condenser
S*HG-C90 Evaporator
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HG-D11 Evaporator
0.5"
0.5"
Condenser
S*HG-D12 Evaporator
Hi-Cap Evaporator
Condenser
S*HG-D13 Evaporator
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
n/a
wavy-3B 0.375"
wavy-3B
n/a
4
5
n/a
4
5
0.5"
n/a
156
148
n/a
152.00
60.40
n/a
0.5"
n/a
Hi-Cap Evaporator
Condenser
n/a
4
wavy-3B 0.375"
156
152.00
103
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Fan Belt Adjustment
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
The supply fan belts and optional exhaust fan belts must be
inspected periodically to assure proper unit operation.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
Replacement is necessary if the belts appear frayed or
worn. Units with dual belts require a matched set of belts to
ensure equal belt length.
When removing or installing the new belts, do not stretch
them over the sheaves. Loosen the belts using the belt ten-
sion adjustment bolts on the motor mounting base.
1. To determine the appropriate belt deflection;
a. Measure the center-to-center shaft distance (in
inches) between the fan and motor sheaves.
Once the new belts are installed, using a Browning or
Gates tension gauge (or equivalent) illustrated below; ad-
just the belt tension as follows;
b. Divide the distance measured in Step 1a by 64; the
resulting value represents the amount of belt
deflection that corresponds to the proper belt
tension.
2. Set the large O-ring on the belt tension gauge at the de-
flection value determined in Step 1b.
3. Set the small O-ring at zero on the force scale of the
gauge plunger.
4. Place the large end of the gauge at the center of the belt
span; then depress the gauge plunger until the large O-
ring is even with the top of the next belt—-or even with a
straightedge placed across the fan and motor sheaves.
Refer to Figure 5-1
.
5. Remove the belt tension gauge. The small O-ring now in-
dicates a number other than zero on the plunger’s force
scale. This number represents the force (in pounds) re-
quired to give the needed deflection.
6. Compare the "force" scale reading (Step 5) with the ap-
propriate “force” value listed in Figure 5-1. If the "force"
reading is outside the range, readjust the belt tension.
Note: Actual belt deflection "force" must not
exceed the maximum “force” value shown in
Figure 5-1.
7. Recheck the belt tension at least twice during the first 2
to 3 days of operation. Belt tension will decrease rapidly
until the new belts are “run in”.
104
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Figure 5-1
Belt Tension Measurement and Deflection Ranges
Deflection Force (Lbs.)
Super
Steel Cable
Belts
Gripbelts
Gripnotch
Gripbelts
Cross Small P.D
Section Range
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min. Max
3.0 -3.6
3.8 - 4.8 3 1/2
5.0 - 7.0
3.4 - 4.2
4.4 - 5.6 5 1/8
3
4 1/2
5
5 1/2
5 1/2
7 1/8
8 3/4
3 7/8
4 1/2
5
5 3/4
6 1/2
5 1/2
6 1/4
6 7/8
8
3 1/4
4
A
B
3 3/4 4 3/4
4 1/4 5 1/4
4 1/2 5 1/2
5 3/4 7 1/4
4
4
9 1/8
5.8 - 8.8 6 3/8
7 3/8 10 1/8
7
8 3/4
Deflection Force (Lbs.)
358
358 Gripnotch
Belt
Gripbelts
Belts
Min.
10
Cross Small P.D
Section Range
Min.
Max.
Max.
4.4 - 8.7 ------
------
15
5V
7.1 - 10.9 10 1/2 15 3/4 12 7/8 18 3/4
11.8 - 16.0 13 19 1/2 15 22
Anytime a compressor is replaced, the oil for each com-
pressor within the manifolded set must be replaced.
Scroll Compressor Replacement
The compressor manifold system was purposely designed
to provide proper oil return to each compressors. The refrig-
erant manifold system must not be modified in any way.
The scroll compressor uses Trane OIL-42 without substitu-
tion. The appropriate oil charge for a 9 and 10 Ton scroll
compressor is 8.5 pints. For a 14 and 15 Ton scroll com-
pressor, use 13.8 pints.
Note: Altering the compressor manifold piping may
cause oil return problems and compressor failure.
Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the
atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is
required, the service technician must comply with
all Federal, State and local laws. Refer to general
service bulletin MSCU-SB-1 (latest edition).
Should a compressor replacement become necessary and
a suction line filter drier is to be installed, install it a mini-
mum of 18 inches upstream of the oil separator tee. See
Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2
Suction Line Filter/Drier Installation
TOP VIEW
Compressor Bracket
Do Not Remove
Common Suction Line from Evaporator
Minimum 18" straight unobstructed
piping between the Suction Filter/Drier
and the first Oil Separator Tee.
30 Ton Compressor Pair Illustrated
Oil Separator Tee
105
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Table 5-8
Supply and Exhaust Fan VFD Programming Parameters
Menu
Parameter Description
Setting
Description
Set only for applications using 3hp Hi-
Efficiency motors. Set to 2.2 kW.
Set only for 200/230v 60hz & 380/415
50hz applications
102
103
Motor Power Set Based on Motor Nameplate
Motor Voltage Set Based on Motor Nameplate
Load
&
Motor
105
106
Motor Current Set Based on Motor Nameplate Sets the motor FLA
Motor RPM Set Based on Motor Nameplate Sets the motor RPM
Reference
&
215
Current Limit 1 x Rated Current
Limits the maximum current to motor
Limits
* These parameters are motor specific and the actual motor nameplate rating must be used. Do not use the unit name
plate values.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage! w/Capacitors!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently
energized. For variable frequency drives or other en-
ergy storing components provided by Trane or others,
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s literature for al-
lowable waiting periods for discharge of capacitors.
Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors
have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and dis-
charge capacitors before servicing could result in death
or serious injury.
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.
3. To modify parameters:
(a) Press the Extended Menu button
(b) Press the Left or Right Arrow button to scroll
through menus
(c) Press the up or down arrow to scroll through
parameter settings within a specified menu
(d) Press the Change Data button to allow a parameter
value to be changed
(e) Press the Up or Down arrow button to change the
parameter
(f) Press OK button when desired change has been
made.
Note: For additional information regarding the safe dis-
charge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN
VFD Programming Parameters
Units shipped with an optional variable frequency drive
(VFD) are preset and run tested at the factory. If a problem
with a VFD occurs, ensure that the programmed param-
eters listed in Table 5-8 have been set before replacing the
drive.
4. Repeat step (3) for each menu selection setting in Table
5-8.
Note: Check to make sure that parameter 104 is set
to 60 Hz. To check parameter 104 press the
Extended Menu button, press the Left Arrow button
until menu Load & Motor is shown, press the up
arrow until parameter 104 is displayed. Parameter
104 can then be modified by pressing the Change
Data button and then the Up Arrow button. When
the desired selection has been made press the OK
button.
5. To reset all programming parameters back to the factory
defaults:
(g) Press the Extended Menu button
(h) Press the Left or Right Arrow button to scroll to the
KEYB. & DISPLAY menu.
(i) Press the Down Arrow button to scroll to the Active
Setup menu.
(j) Press the Change Data button.
(k) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Factory
Default setting.
(l) Press the OK button.
(m) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Setup
Copy menu.
(n) Press the Change Data button.
(o) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Copy to
Setup 1 setting.
Should replacing the a VFD become necessary, the re-
placement is not configured with all of Trane's operating
parameters. The VFD must be programmed before at-
tempting to operate the unit.
To verify and/or program a VFD, use the following steps:
1. At the unit, turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S70 to
the "Off" position.
(p) Press the OK button.
2. Turn the 24 volt control circuit switch to the "Off' position.
106
(q) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Active
Setup menu.
(r) Press the Change Data button.
(s) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Setup 1
setting.
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Monthly Maintenance
Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF
and lock the main power disconnect switch open.
(t) Press the OK button.
(v) Press the Change Data button.
(w) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Down
load All Parameters setting.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
(x) Press the OK button
Note: Item 5 resets the drive to the default factory
settings. The program parameters listed in Table 5-
8 will need to be verified or changed as described in
Item 3 and 4.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
Note: Some of the parameters listed in the Table are
motor specific. Due to various motors and
efficiencies available, use only the values stamped
on the specific motor nameplate. Do not use the
Unit nameplate values.
Filters
[ ] Inspect the return air filters. Clean or replace them if nec-
essary. Refer to the Table 5-4 for filter information.
Cooling Season
6. Follow the start-up procedures for supply fan in the "Vari
able Air Volume System" section or the "Exhaust Airflow
Measurement" start-up procedures for the exhaust fan.
[ ] Check the unit’s drain pans and condensate piping to
ensure that there are no blockages.
7. After verifying that the VFD(s) are operating properly,
press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module to
stop the unit operation.
[ ] Inspect the evaporator and condenser coils for dirt, bent
fins, etc. If the coils appear dirty, clean them according to
the instructions described in “Coil Cleaning” later in this
section.
8. Follow the applicable steps in the "Final Unit Checkout"
section to return the unit to its normal operating mode.
[ ] Manually rotate the condenser fans to ensure free move-
ment and check motor bearings for wear. Verify that all of
the fan mounting hardware is tight.
[ ] Inspect the F/A-R/A damper hinges and pins to ensure
that all moving parts are securely mounted. Keep the
blades clean as necessary.
[ ] Verify that all damper linkages move freely; lubricate with
white grease, if necessary.
[ ] Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the
motor as necessary.
[ ] Check the fan shaft bearings for wear. Replace the bear-
ings as necessary.
[ ] Lubricate the supply fan bearings with a lithium based
grease. Refer to Table 5-6 for recommended greases.
Note: The bearings are manufactured using a
special synthetic lithium based grease designed for
long life and minimum lube intervals. Over
lubrication can be just as harmful as not enough.
Use a hand grease gun to lubricate these bearings; add
grease until a light bead appears all around the seal. Do not
over lubricate!
After greasing the bearings, check the setscrews to ensure
that the shaft is held securely to the bearings and fan
wheels. Make sure that all bearing supports are tight.
[ ] Check the supply fan belt(s). If the belts are frayed or
worn, replace them. Refer to the "Fan Belt Adjustment"
section for belt replacement and adjustments.
107
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
After greasing the bearings, check the setscrews to ensure
that the shaft is held securely. Make sure that all bearing
braces are tight.
[ ] Check the condition of the gasket around the control
panel doors. These gaskets must fit correctly and be in
good condition to prevent water leakage.
[ ] Inspect both the main unit control panel and heat section
control box for loose electrical components and terminal
connections, as well as damaged wire insulation. Make
any necessary repairs.
[ ] Verify that all wire terminal connections are tight.
[ ] Remove any corrosion present on the exterior surfaces
of the unit and repaint these areas.
[ ] Gas Heat Units only - Check the heat exchanger for any
corrosion, cracks, or holes.
[ ] Generally inspect the unit for unusual conditions (e.g.,
loose access panels, leaking piping connections, etc.)
[ ] Check the combustion air blower for dirt. Clean as neces-
sary.
[ ] Make sure that all retaining screws are reinstalled in the
unit access panels once these checks are complete.
[ ] With the unit running, check and record the:
Note: Typically, it is not necessary to clean the gas
furnace. However, if cleaning does become
necessary, remove the burner inspection plate from
the rear of the heat exchanger to access the drum.
Be sure to replace the existing gaskets with new
ones before reinstalling the inspection plate.
ambient temperature;
compressor oil level (each circuit);
compressor suction and discharge pressures (each
circuit);
superheat and subcooling (each circuit);
Record this data on an “operator’s maintenance log” like
the one shown in Table 5-8. If the operating pressures in-
dicate a refrigerant shortage, measure the system super-
heat and system subcooling. For guidelines, refer to
"Charging by Subcooling".
[ ] Open the main gas valve and apply power to the unit
heating section; then initiate a "Heat" test using the start-
up procedure described in "Gas Furnace Start-Up".
WARNING
Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the
atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is
required, the service technician must comply with
all federal, state and local laws. Refer to general
service bulletin MSCU-SB-1 (latest edition).
Hazardous Gases and Flammable Vapors!
Exposure to hazardous gases from fuel substances
have been shown to cause cancer, birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Improper installation, adjust-
ment, alteration, service or use of this product could
cause flammable mixtures. To avoid hazardous gases
and flammable vapors follow proper installation and set
up of this product and all warnings as provided in this
manual. Failure to follow all instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
Heating Season
Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF
and lock the main power disconnect switch open.
When using dry nitrogen cylinders for pressurizing
units for leak testing, always provide a pressure regula-
tor on the cylinder to prevent excessively high unit
pressures. Never pressurize unit above the maximum
recommended unit test pressure as specified in appli-
cable unit literature. Failure to properly regulate pres-
sure could result in a violent explosion, which could re-
sult in death or serious injury or equipment or prop-
erty-only-damage.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-
vicing could result in death or serious injury.
[ ] Verify that the ignition system operates properly.
[ ] Inspect the unit’s air filters. If necessary, clean or replace
them.
Coil Cleaning
[ ] Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the
motor as necessary.
Regular coil maintenance, including annual cleaning—en-
hances the unit’s operating efficiency by minimizing:
[ ] Lubricate the supply fan bearings with a lithium based
grease. Refer to Table 5-6 for recommended greases.
compressor head pressure and amperage draw;
water carryover;
fan brake horsepower; and,
static pressure losses.
Note: The bearings are manufactured using a
special synthetic lithium based grease designed for
long life and minimum lube intervals. Too much
lubrication in a bearing can be just as harmful as
not enough.
At least once each year—or more often if the unit is located
in a “dirty” environment—clean the evaporator and con-
denser coils using the instructions outlined below. Be sure
to follow these instructions as closely as possible to avoid
damaging the coils.
Use a hand grease gun to lubricate the bearings; add
grease until a light bead appears all around the seal. Do not
over lubricate!
108
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Note: Refrigerant oil is detrimental to some roofing
materials. Care must be taken to protect the roof
from oil leaks or spills.
CAUTION
Coil Cleaners!
Coil cleaners can damage roofs, surrounding buildings,
vehicles, etc. Cleaning substances should be checked
to ensure that they will not cause damage to surround-
ings. Coils and roof (if applicable) should berinsed thor-
oughly. Do not spray coil cleaners in windy conditions.
4. Pour the cleaning solution into the sprayer. If a high-
pressure sprayer is used:
a. Do not allow the sprayer pressure to exceed 600
psi. The minimum spray nozzle angle is 15 degrees.
Refrigerant Coils
b. Spray the solution perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to
the coil face.
To clean refrigerant coils, use a soft brush and a sprayer
(either a garden pump-up type or a high-pressure sprayer).
A high-quality detergent is also required; suggested
brands include “SPREX A.C.”, “OAKITE 161”, “OAKITE
166” and “COILOX”. If the detergent selected is strongly al-
kaline (pH value exceeds 8.5), add an inhibitor.
c. Maintain a minimum clearance of 6" between the
sprayer nozzle and the coil.
5. Spray the leaving-airflow side of the coil first; then spray
the opposite side of the coil. Allow the cleaning solution
to stand on the coil for five minutes.
1. Remove the access panels on both sides of the unit and
the filters.
6. Rinse both sides of the coil with cool, clean water.
7. Inspect both sides of the coil; if it still appears to be dirty,
repeat Steps 7 and 8.
WARNING
No Step Surface!
8. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in
Step 2; then restore power to the unit.
Do not walk on the sheet metal drain pan.Walking on the
drain pan could cause the supporting metal to collapse.
Failure of the drain pan could result in death or serious
injury.
Steam or Hot Water Coils
To clean a steam or hot water coil, use a soft brush, a
steam-cleaning machine, and water.
Note: Bridging between the unit's main supports
may consist of multiple 2 by 12 boards or sheet
metal grating.
1. Verify that switches 1S1 and 1S70 are turned "OFF", and
that the main unit disconnect is locked open.
2. Straighten any bent coil fins with a fin comb. (Use the
data in Table 5-7 to determine the appropriate fin comb
size.)
2. Remove enough panels and components from the unit
to gain sufficient access to the coil.
3. Straighten any bent coil fins with a fin comb. (Use the
data in Table 5-5 to determine the appropriate fin comb
size.)
3. Mix the detergent with water according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. If desired, heat the solution
to 150 F maximum to improve its cleansing capability.
4. Remove loose dirt and debris from both sides of the coil
with a soft brush.
WARNING
5. Use the steam-cleaning machine to clean the leaving-air
side of the coil first; start at the top of the coil and work
downward; then clean the entering-air side of the coil,
starting at the top of the coil and working downward.
Contains Refrigerant!
System contains oil and refrigerant under high pres-
sure. Recover refrigerant to relieve pressure before
opening the system. See unit nameplate for refrigerant
type. Do not use non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant
substitutes, or refrigerant additives.
6. Check both sides of the coil; if it still appears dirty, repeat
Step 5.
Failure to follow proper procedures or the use of non-ap-
proved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refriger-
ant additives could result in death or serious injury or
equipment damage.
7. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in
Step 2; then restore power to the unit.
6. Rinse both sides of the coil with cool, clean water.
7. Inspect both sides of the coil; if it still appears to be dirty,
repeat Steps 7 and 8.
8. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in
Step 2; then restore power to the unit.
109
Service & Maintenance (Continued)
Complete Unit Model Number:
Final Process
For future reference, you may find it helpful to record the
unit data in the blanks provided.
Unit Serial Number:
Unit "DL" Number ("Design special" units only):
Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control panel):
—schematic(s)
—connections
Unit Address (TCI)
Network ID (LCI)
Table 5-8 Sample Operator's Maintenance Log (See Note)
Refrigerant Circuit #1
Current
Refrigerant Circuit #2
Ambient Compr. Suct. Disch. Liquid Super- Sub- Compr. Suct. Disch. Liquid Super- Sub-
Temp.
(F)
Oil
Press. Press. Press. heat
cool.
(F)
Oil
Press. Press. Press. heat
cool.
(F)
Date
Level (Psig) (Psig) (Psig)
(F)
Level (Psig) (Psig) (Psig)
(F)
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
- ok
- ok
- low
- low
Note:
Check and record the data requested above each month during the cooling season with the unit running.
110
Index
A
D
AC Conductors ................................................................. 45
See Table 3-8
Adjusting the Fresh Air Damper ...................................... 80
Airflow Measurements ..................................................... 63
Damper Adjustment ...........................................................93
See Low Ambient Dampers
Damper Installation............................................................94
See Low Ambient Dampers
Daytime Warm-up .............................................................. 11
DC Conductors ..................................................................45
See Table 3-9
B
Dimensional data ........................................................ 15-20
See Table 3-1A: Table 3-1B: Table 3-1C;
Table 3-2A: Table 3-2B: Table 3-2C
DIP switch settings - TCI .....................................................7
discharge pressure approaches 405 ± 7 psig .....................9
discharge pressure decreases to approximately 300 .........9
Dry Airside Pressure Drop ........................................... 70-72
See Figure 4-3 (Standard & HI Cap)
DSP control devices ..........................................................31
See Figure 3-9: Units with Statitrac
BAYSENS008B ................................................................ 49
See Figure 3-16
BAYSENS010B ................................................................ 49
See Figure 3-16; Remote Panel w/o NSB
BAYSENS013C ........................................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
BAYSENS014C ........................................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
BAYSENS016A ........................................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17; Outside Air Sensor
(3RT3) - BAYSENS016A
E
BAYSENS017B ........................................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
BAYSENS019* ................................................................. 49
See Figure 3-16
BAYSENS020* ................................................................. 52
"efficiency check point" setting ............................................9
Electric Heat ......................................................................58
electric heat units operating on 200/230 volts ................ 39
See Figure 3-14
See Figure 3-17
BAYSENS021A ................................................................ 52
See Figure 3-17
Belt Tension Measurement and Deflection Ranges ..... 105
Electrical Service Sizing Data ...........................................41
See Table 3-7
Electrical Service Sizing Equations ................................ 43
See Figure 3-15
See Figure 5-1
Emergency Stop Switch (5S71) ...................................... 48
Evaporator Temperature Sensor ........................................8
Exhaust Air Dampers ....................................................... 80
Exhaust Airflow Measurement ......................................... 66
Exhaust Fan Performance ........................................... 77-79
See Table 4-3: Table 4-4
Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy Module ..............................7
External Auto/Stop Switch (5S67) .............................. 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
C
Cautions ..............................................................................6
Center-of-Gravity.............................................................. 21
See Figure 3-3
Charging by Subcooling .................................................. 93
Coil Cleaning ................................................................. 108
Combustion Air Adjustment ............................................. 95
See High-Fire Adjustment: Full Modulating Gas
Furnace: Limited Modulating Gas Furnace
Component Static Pressure Drops.................................. 76
See Table 4-2
Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware.................... 27
See Figure 3-7A: Figure 3-7B: Figure 3-7C
Compressor Circuit Breakers ................................. 10, 100
See Table 5-2
Compressor Locations.......................................................84
See Figure 4-6
F
F/A Damper Travel Adjustment ........................................ 82
See Table 4-5
factory mounted disconnect switch ...................................38
Fan Belt Adjustment ....................................................... 104
Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes ................... 73-75
See Figure 4-4
Fan Performance without Inlet Guide
Compressor Module ............................................................7
Compressor Module (SCM) detects a problem.................10
Compressor Motor Winding Thermostats .........................10
Compressor Sounds ..........................................................83
concealed damage ............................................................14
Condensate Trap Installation.............................................27
See Figure 3-6
Vanes ........................................................................... 67-69
See Figure 4-2
Fan Rotation ......................................................................63
fans are rotating backwards ..............................................63
Fenwal Ignition System .....................................................56
See Two Stage Gas Furnace
Field Connection Diagram Notes ............................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
Condenser Fan Location ...................................................64
See Figure 4-1
Filter Data ........................................................................102
See Table 5-4
Filter Switch .........................................................................8
Filters ...................................................................... 102, 107
See Filter Data: Table 5-4: Filter Switch
Flame Failure ............................................................... 96-97
See Modulating Gas
Float-and-Thermostatic (FT) type trap ............................. 37
See Figure 3-13
Flue Assembly ...................................................................34
condensing temperature rises above the "lower limit" ......9
Connection Sizes for Hot Water & Steam Coil................ 35
See Table 3-5
Constant Volume Systems ................................................63
Constant Volume Zone Panel............................................46
Control Settings and Time Delays ...................................100
See Table 5-1
Customer Connection Wire Range ...................................40
See Table 3-6
CV Control Options ..................................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
111
Measuring Subcooling..................................................... 93
See Charging by Subcooling
See Figure 3-11
Flue Gas Carbon Dioxide & Oxygen Measurements ..... 96
Measuring Superheat ........................................................93
Minimum Position Potentiometer ......................................47
Model Number Description ............................................ 4 - 5
Modulating Gas..................................................................57
Modulating Gas Furnace ................................................. 97
Modulating Gas Heat control .................................... 97 - 98
See Full Modulating Gas Furnace: Limited
See Figure 4-7
Freeze Protection ..............................................................58
Freezestat ..........................................................................10
Fresh Air & Return Air Damper ................................... 80-81
See Figure 4-5: Table 4-5
Frostat Control ...................................................................55
Fuse replacement data ....................................................101
Modulating Gas Furnace
Modulating Gas Regulator.................................................98
See Figure 4-9
G
Modulating Gas Train ........................................................34
See Figure 3-10
Morning Warm-Up .............................................................10
motor winding temperature decreases
to approximate ...................................................................10
motor windings exceeds approximately 221 F ..................10
Gas Trains ..........................................................................33
See 235 and 350 MBH: 500 and 850 MBH:
1000 MBH and Modulating
Gas Valve Adjustment Screw Locations............................96
See Figure 4-8
"Gate" type valve ......................................................... 36-37
See Figure 3-12: Figure 3-13
GBAS Analog Input Wiring Diagram .................................54
See Figure 3-18; GBAS Voltage vs Setpoint
GBAS Voltage vs Setpoint.................................................54
See Figure 3-18
N
nameplate location ..............................................................6
Natural Gas Combustion Curve ........................................96
See Table 4-8
Generic Building Automation System ................................48
Generic Building Automation System Module .....................8
Grease Recommendations ..............................................103
See Table 5-6
O
Occupied Cooling .............................................................. 11
Occupied Heating .............................................................. 11
Occupied/Unoccupied Contacts ....................................... 47
Operating Pressure Curve........................................... 85-92
See Table 4-6 (Standard & Hi Cap)
Operation and Service Clearances ...................................15
Operator's Maintenance Log .......................................... 110
See Table 5-8
ordering replacement parts ................................................ 4
Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor ............................................. 9
Outside Air Pressure Sensor ........................................... 31
Outside Air Sensor ........................................................... 31
See Figure 3-9
H
Head Pressure Control ........................................................9
Heat Exchanger ............................................................... 98
See Limited Modulating Gas Furnace;
Modulating Gas Furnace
Heat Module ........................................................................7
heating coil falls to 40 F.....................................................10
High Duct Temp Thermostats(3S16, 3S17) ......................10
high duct thermostat can be reset .....................................10
High Pressure Controls .......................................................9
High-Fire Adjustment .........................................................95
See Two Stage Gas Furnace
Honeywell Ignition System ................................................56
See Two Stage Gas Furnace
P
Hot Water Piping................................................................36
See Figure 3-12
Human Interface Module ....................................................7
See also appropriate SAHF-PTG manual
P-Traps at the unit ........................................................... 27
See Figure 3-6
Power Wire Sizing and Protection Device Equations..... 43
See Figure 3-15
Propane Gas......................................................................56
I
R
Interprocessor Communications Board..............................7
Refrigerant Charging .........................................................83
Refrigerant Coil Fin Data .................................................103
See Table 5-7
L
Refrigerant Coils ..............................................................109
See Coil Cleaning
Remote Human Interface Module .................................... 46
Remote Panel w/ NSB .......................................................45
See BAYSENS019*: BAYSENS020*
Remote Panel w/o NSB ............................................ 45, 46
See BAYSENS010B: BAYSENS021A
Remote Zone Sensor ........................................................46
request for exhaust fan operation .......................................8
request for supply fan operation..........................................8
requesting service .............................................................. 4
required number of conductors .................................. 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
Lead-Lag..............................................................................9
Lead/Lag Operation ......................................................... 56
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace .................................... 98
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout ................................. 10
Low Ambient Control ......................................................... 9
Low Ambient Dampers ................................................... 93
Low Pressure Control ........................................................ 9
Low-Fire Adjustment ........................................................ 95
See Two Stage Gas Furnace
M
Manifold Pressures and CO2 Levels.................................96
See Gas Furnace Start-Up: Table 4-7
Return Air Humidity Sensor ................................................ 9
112
Return Air Humidity Sensor (3U64) .................................. 8
return air temperature reaches 135 F ............................. 10
Rooftop Module...................................................................7
RTM Resistance Input vs Setpoint Temperatures ............. 7
RTM Resistance Value vs System Operating Mode ..........7
See VOM Contacts: FIgure 3-16: Figure 3-17
U
unit and curb operating weights ........................................22
See Table 3-3
Unit Internal Fuse Replacement Data & VFD
Factory Settings...............................................................101
See Table 5-3
units electric heat units operating on 460/575 vol.......... 39
See Figure 3-14
S
Sample Model Number ....................................................4–5
Sample Operator's Maintenance Log .............................. 110
See Table 5-8
Saturated Condenser Temperature Sensors ..................... 9
saturated condensing temperature falls ............................ 9
Scroll Compressor Replacement ....................................105
See Figure 5-2
Service Test Guide for Component Operation ................. 61
See Table 4-1
"Shipwith" Locations ......................................................... 11
Sizing Natural Gas Pipe Mains & Branches......................33
See Table 3-4
units operating on 200/230 volts .......................................38
units operating on 460/575 volts ...................................... 38
Units with an Economizer ................................................ 55
Units with TraqTM Sensor ................................................ 55
Units without an Economizer ............................................ 55
Unoccupied Heating ......................................................... 11
unoccupied to an occupied mode with
the MWU option ................................................................ 10
some fans are rotating backwards ....................................63
See Fan Rotation
V
Space Pressure Transducer ...................................... 10, 31
See Figure 3-9
Status/Annunciator Output ..................................................9
Steam or Hot Water Coils .................................. 36, 37, 109
See Coil Cleaning; Figure 3-12: Figure 3-13:
"Wet Heat"
Variable Air Volume Systems ........................................... 65
VAV Changeover Contacts .............................................. 46
VAV Control Option ..................................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
VCM optional CO2 sensor................................................. 8
VCM optional temperature sensor .................................... 8
Velocity Pressure Transducer/Solenoid Assembly ........... 8
Ventilation Control Module ................................................ 8
Ventilation Override Module .............................................. 7
VFD Programming Parameters ..................................... 106
See Table 5-8
Voltage Imbalance ............................................................ 60
Voltage Supply .................................................................. 60
VOM Contacts .................................................................. 47
See VOM Modes
VOM Mode “A” .................................................................. 47
See VOM Contacts
VOM Mode “B” ...................................................................47
See VOM Contacts
VOM Mode “C”...................................................................47
See VOM Contacts
VOM Mode “D”...................................................................47
See VOM Contacts
VOM Mode “E” .................................................................. 47
See VOM Contacts
Suction Line Filter/Drier Installation ............................... 105
See Figure 5-2
suction pressure approaches 7 ± 4 psig .............................9
suction pressure exceeds 22 ± 4 psig................................ 9
supply air temperature falls 10 F below .......................... 10
Supply Air Temperature Low Limit.................................... 10
supply air temperature reaches 10 F above .................... 10
supply air temperature reaches 240 F ............................. 10
Supply Air Temperature Sensor (3RT9) ............................ 8
Supply Air Tempering........................................................ 10
Supply and Exhaust Airflow Proving Switch....................... 8
Supply and Exhaust Fan Circuit Breakers ........................ 9
Supply and Exhaust Fan Shipping Channels ................. 30
See Figure 3-8
Supply and Exhaust Fan VFD Programming
Parameters ......................................................................106
See Table 5-8
Supply Duct Static Pressure Control ............................... 11
swing-check vacuum breaker .......................................... 37
See Figure 3-13
W
T
Warnings ............................................................................. 6
Wet Airside Pressure Drop ......................................... 70-72
See Figure 4-3
Wet Heat ............................................................................58
“Wet” heat actuator ............................................................58
"Wet Heat" Coil Fin Data .................................................102
See Table 5-5
"temporary low limit suppression" setting ...........................9
Thermostatic Expansion Valves ....................................... 83
Trane Communications Interface Module ...........................7
Trane OIL-42......................................................................83
Transducer Voltage Output vs Pressure Input ................. 10
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement ............................. 66
Two Stage Gas Furnace .................................................. 56
Typical Field Power Wiring............................................... 39
See Figure 3-14
Z
Typical Field Wiring Diagram ..................................... 49-53
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17
Typical Gas Furnace......................................................... 99
See Figure 4-10
Zone Temperature - Cooling..............................................10
Zone Temperature - Heating .............................................10
Typical Ventilation Override Binary
Output Wiring ............................................................... 50-53
113
WARRANTY AND LIABILITY CLAUSE
COMMERCIAL EQUIPMENT
RATED 20 TONS AND LARGER AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
PRODUCTS COVERED - This warranty* is extended by
THE WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET
American Standard Inc. and applies only to commercial
FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL
equipment rated 20 Tons and larger and related accesso-
OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES,
ries.
WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLI-
The Company warrants for a period of 12 months from ini-
GENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW
tial start-up or 18 months from date of shipment, whichever
OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WAR-
is less, that the Company products covered by this order
(1) are free from defects in material and workmanship and
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
(2) have the capacities and ratings set forth in the
FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, IN NO
Company’s catalogs and bulletins, provided that no war-
EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES.
ranty is made against corrosion, erosion or deterioration.
The Company’s obligations and liabilities under this war-
ranty are limited to furnishing f.o.b. factory or warehouse at
Company designated shipping point, freight allowed to
Buyer’s city (or port of export for shipment outside the con-
terminous United States) replacement equipment (or at the
option of the Company parts therefore) for all Company
products not conforming to this warranty and which have
been returned to the manufacturer. The Company shall not
be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liabil-
ity whatever shall attach to the Company until said prod-
ucts have been paid for and then said liability shall be lim-
ited to the purchase price of the equipment shown to be
defective.
Manager - Product Service
American Standard Inc.
Clarksville, Tn 37040-1008
PW-215-2688
*A 10 year limited warranty is provided on optional Full
Modulation Gas Heat Exchanger.
*Optional Extended Warranties are available for compres-
sors and heat exchangers of Combination Gas-Electric Air
Conditioning Units.
The Company makes certain further warranty protection
available on an optional extra-cost basis. Any further war-
ranty must be in writing, signed by an officer of the Com-
pany.
The warranty and liability set forth herein are in lieu of all
other warranties and liabilities, whether in contract or in
negligence, express or implied, in law or in fact, including
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for par-
ticular use. In no event shall the Company be liable for any
incidental or consequential damages.
CAUTION
Equipment Damage From Ultraviolet
(UV) Lights!
Trane does not recommend field installation of ultravio-
let lights in its equipment for the intended purpose of im-
proving indoor air quality. High intensity C-band ultravio-
let light is known to severely damage polymer (plastic)
materials and poses a personal safety risk to anyone
exposed to the light without proper personal protective
equipment. Polymer materials commonly found in HVAC
equipment that may be susceptible include insulation on
electrical wiring, fan belts, thermal insulation, various
fasteners and bushings. Degradation of these materials
can result in serious damage to the equipment.
Trane accepts no responsibility for the performance or
operation of our equipment in which ultraviolet devices
were installed outside of theTrane factory or its
approved suppliers.
114
|